Pioneer SC-LX75, SC-LX85 Operating Instruction

Download

SC-LX85

SC-LX75

IMPORTANT

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture.

WARNING

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully.

The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel.

VENTILATION CAUTION

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 20 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 20 cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

D3-4-2-1-3_A1_En

D3-4-2-1-4*_A1_En

D3-4-2-1-7b*_A1_En

DO NOT OPEN

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity: +5 °C to +35 °C (+41 °F to +95 °F); less than 85 %RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

CAUTION

The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En

D3-4-2-1-7c*_A1_En

D3-4-2-1-7a_A1_En

D3-4-2-2-1a_A1_En

D3-4-2-2-2a*_A1_En

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.

If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows;

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

D3-4-2-1-2-2*_A2_En

Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries

Symbol for

equipment

Symbol examples

for batteries

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

These symbols are only valid in the European Union.

For countries outside the European Union:

If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

K058a_A1_En

K041_A1_En

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

Contents

01 Before you start

Our philosophy ................................................ 6

Features ........................................................... 6

Checking what’s in the box ............................ 7

Installing the receiver ..................................... 7

Loading the batteries ...................................... 7

Operating range of remote control unit........ 7

Flow for operating the receiver with RF

two-way communications .............................. 7

About using AVNavigator

(included CD-ROM) ........................................ 8

02 Controls and displays

Remote control (In case of SC-LX85) ............ 9

Remote control (In case of SC-LX75) .......... 11

Display ........................................................... 12

Front panel .................................................... 13

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment ........................ 14

Rear panel ..................................................... 14

Connecting the RF adapter .......................... 15

Determining the speakers’ application ...... 15

Placing the speakers .................................... 17

Connecting the speakers ............................. 18

Installing your speaker system .................... 19

About the audio connection ........................ 24

About the video converter ............................ 24

About HDMI .................................................. 24

Connecting your TV and playback

components .................................................. 25

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD

recorder and other video sources ............... 26

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or

other set-top box ........................................... 27

Connecting other audio components ......... 27

Connecting the multichannel analog

inputs ............................................................. 28

Connecting additional amplifiers ................ 28

Connecting AM/FM antennas ..................... 29

MULTI-ZONE setup ....................................... 29

Connecting to the network through

LAN interface ................................................ 30

Connecting optional Bluetooth

ADAPTER ...................................................... 31

Connecting an iPod ...................................... 31

Connecting a USB device ............................ 31

Connecting an HDMI-equipped

component to the front panel input ............ 31

Connecting to a wireless LAN ..................... 31

Connecting an IR receiver ........................... 32

Operating other Pioneer components

with this unit’s sensor .................................. 32

Switching components on and off

using the 12 volt trigger ................................ 33

Plugging in the receiver ............................... 33

04 Basic Setup

About remote control operation .................. 34

Changing the OSD display language

(OSD Language) ........................................... 34

Automatically conducting optimum

sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) ............... 34

The Input Setup menu .................................. 36

Operation Mode Setup ................................. 36

05 Basic playback

About remote control operation .................. 38

Playing a source ........................................... 38

Playing an iPod ............................................. 38

Playing a USB device ................................... 39

Listening to the radio .................................... 41

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless

Enjoyment of Music ...................................... 43

06 Listening to your system

About remote control operation .................. 45

Enjoying various types of playback

using the listening modes ........................... 45

Selecting MCACC presets ........................... 47

Choosing the input signal ............................ 47

Better sound using Phase Control .............. 47

Better sound using Phase Control and

Full Band Phase Control .............................. 48

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA

GALLERY inputs

About remote control operation .................. 49

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery ............... 49

Features of Home Media Gallery ................. 49

Introduction ................................................... 49

Playback with Home Media Gallery ............ 50

Advanced operations for Internet radio ...... 51

About network playback............................... 51

About playable file formats .......................... 53

08 Control with HDMI function

About remote control operation .................. 54

About the Control with HDMI function ....... 54

Making Control with HDMI connections .... 54

HDMI Setup................................................... 54

Before using synchronization ...................... 55

About synchronized operations .................. 55

Setting the PQLS function ........................... 56

About Auto Sound Retriever Link and

Stream Smoother Link ................................. 56

Cautions on the Control with HDMI

function ......................................................... 56

09 Using other functions

About remote control operation .................. 57

Setting the Audio options ............................ 57

Setting the Video options ............................. 59

Switching the speaker terminals ................ 61

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls ................. 61

Making an audio or a video recording ........ 62

Reducing the level of an analog signal ....... 62

Using the sleep timer ................................... 62

Dimming the display .................................... 62

Switching the HDMI output ......................... 62

Checking your system settings ................... 63

Resetting the system .................................... 63

10 Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX85)

About the Remote Setup menu................... 64

Operating multiple receivers ....................... 64

Setting the remote to control other

components .................................................. 64

Selecting preset codes directly ................... 65

Programming signals from other

remote controls ............................................. 65

Erasing one of the remote control

button settings .............................................. 66

Resetting the input assignment of one

of the input function buttons ....................... 66

Resetting the remote control settings ........ 66

Confirming preset codes ............................. 66

Renaming input function names

manually ........................................................ 66

Direct function .............................................. 66

Multi Operation and System Off .................. 67

Controlling components .............................. 68

Using the RF communications function .... 70

Operating this receiver by RF

communications........................................... 71

Operating other components by RF

communications........................................... 71

Renaming input function names in

synchrony with the receiver ......................... 72

Setting the remote control operation

mode .............................................................. 72

Precautions when using the Omni-

Directional RF Remote Control ................... 72

11 Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX75)

About the Remote Setup menu................... 74

Operating multiple receivers ....................... 74

Setting the remote to control other

components .................................................. 74

Selecting preset codes directly ................... 75

Programming signals from other

remote controls ............................................. 75

Erasing one of the remote control

button settings .............................................. 75

Erasing all learnt settings that are in

one input function ........................................ 75

Direct function .............................................. 76

Setting the backlight mode ......................... 76

Multi Operation and System Off .................. 76

Resetting the remote control settings ........ 77

Controlling components .............................. 78

12 The Advanced MCACC menu

About remote control operation .................. 80

Making receiver settings from the

Advanced MCACC menu ............................. 80

Automatic MCACC (Expert) ......................... 80

Manual MCACC setup ................................. 82

Checking MCACC Data ................................ 85

Data Management........................................ 86

13 The System Setup and Other

Setup menus

About remote control operation .................. 87

Making receiver settings from the

System Setup menu ..................................... 87

Manual speaker setup .................................. 87

Network Setup menu ................................... 89

Checking the Network Information ............. 91

The Other Setup menu ................................. 91

14 Additional information

Troubleshooting 1 ......................................... 94

Troubleshooting 2 ....................................... 100

Troubleshooting of wireless LAN .............. 103

About status messages ............................. 104

Speaker Setting Guide................................ 105

Important information regarding the

HDMI connection ....................................... 106

Cleaning the unit ........................................ 106

Precautions when using the Wireless

LAN converter ............................................. 106

Declaration of Conformity with regard

to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC .............. 107

Surround sound formats ........................... 108

About THX ................................................... 108

About iPod ................................................... 109

About FLAC ................................................. 110

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct

with different input signal formats ............ 110

Glossary ....................................................... 111

Features index ............................................. 114

Specifications ............................................. 115

Preset code list............................................ 116

Flow of settings on the receiver

Flow for connecting and setting the receiver

The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped with an abundance of functions and terminals. It can be used easily after following the procedure below to make the connections and settings.

Required setting item: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 Setting to be made as necessary: 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13

Important

The receiver’s initial settings can be made on the computer using Wiring Navi on the AVNavigator CD-ROM included with the receiver. In this case, virtually the same connections and settings as in steps 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9 can be made interactively. For instructions on using AVNavigator, see About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM) on page 8.

1 Before you start

! Checking what’s in the box on page 7 ! Loading the batteries on page 7

j

2 Determining the speakers’ application (page 15)

! [A] 9.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) connection ! [B] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection ! [C] 7.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) ! [D] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) ! [E] 7.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone) ! [F] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) & ZONE 2

connection (Multi Zone)

! [G] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2/ZONE 3 connection (Multi Zone)

SC-LX85 only:

! [H] 5.2 channel surround system & Speaker B Bi-amping connection ! [I] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Surround Bi-amping connection (High quality

surround)

! [J] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Center Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

j

3 Connecting the speakers

! Placing the speakers on page 17 ! Connecting the speakers on page 18 ! Installing your speaker system on page 19 ! Bi-amping your speakers on page 18

j

4 Connecting the components

! About the audio connection on page 24 ! About the video converter on page 24 ! Connecting your TV and playback components on page 25 ! Connecting AM/FM antennas on page 29

! Plugging in the receiver on page 33

j

5 Power On

j

6 Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) (page 34)

j

7 MCACC speaker settings

! Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34

j

8 The Input Setup menu (page 36)

(When using connections other than the recommended connections)

j

9 Basic playback (page 38)

j

10 Switching the HDMI output (page 62)

j

11 Adjusting the sound and picture quality as desired

! Using the various listening modes (page 45) ! Better sound using Phase Control (page 47) ! Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control (page 48) ! Measuring the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 80) ! Changing the channel level while listening (page 89) ! Switching on/off the Acoustic Calibration EQ, Auto Sound Retriever or Dialog Enhancement

(page 57)

! Setting the PQLS function (page 56) ! Setting the Audio options (page 57) ! Setting the Video options (page 59)

j

12 Other optional adjustments and settings

! Control with HDMI function (page 54) ! The Advanced MCACC menu (page 80) ! The System Setup and Other Setup menus (page 87)

j

13 Making maximum use of the remote control

In case of SC-LX85

! Operating multiple receivers (page 64) ! Setting the remote to control other components (page 64) ! Using the RF communications function (page 70)

In case of SC-LX75

! Operating multiple receivers (page 74) ! Setting the remote to control other components (page 74)

01 Before you start

Before you start

Our philosophy

Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing on three important steps:

1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality

2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area

3 Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-class studio engineers

With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated AIR Studios Monitor:

Features

% Apple AirPlay®

With AirPlay you can stream music from iTunes to the SC-LX85 and SC-LX75 and play it through your home cinema system. You can even use the receiver to view metadata including song title, artist as well as album art on a connected display. With Pioneer’s Air Play-compatible receivers, you can easily enjoy your iTunes music in any room in the house.

% HOME MEDIA GALLERY

This receiver can play back contents stored on your computer when your computer is connected to the LAN terminal of this receiver.

% About operation of the receiver with a mobile terminal (iPod, iPhone, etc.)

The receiver can be controlled from the mobile terminal by installing a special application on the mobile terminal. For details, see the product information on the Pioneer website. This special application may be changed or discontinued without notice.

% iControlAV2 Remote Control App compatible

The SC-LX85 and SC-LX75 are compatible with a completely re-designed remote control application for iPod touch, iPhone and now iPad. Improvements include a comprehensive front page layout, iPad rotation, DLNA and vTuner control, new exciting Finger EQ, and Pioneer compatible Blu-ray Disc player control. iControlAV2 is free from the App Store.

% Air Jam App compatible

For the SC-LX85 and SC-LX75, the optional AS-BT200 Bluetooth adapter works together with Pioneer’s exclusive Air Jam application. Available free in the App Store, Air Jam allows up to 4 iPhone, iPod touch or iPod devices to share music and create a group playlist for a unique and fun social music network experience.

% AVNavigator

The CD-ROM (AVNavigator) included with this unit provides a variety of functions, such as Wiring Navi with a guide for connecting the unit and setting up from the computer and an Interactive Manual for operating the unit while reading the manual.

% HDMI (3D, Audio Return Channel)

A compatible component is required to use the above function.

% PQLS Bit-stream

Jitterless high quality playback is possible by connecting a PQLS-compatible player with HDMI connections.

% Auto Sound Retriever Link

By connecting a Pioneer player supporting the Sound Retriever Link function, compressed audio files played on the player can be corrected automatically to play the sound with higher density.

% Stream Smoother Link

By connecting a Pioneer player supporting the Stream Smoother Link function, compressed video or movie files played on the player can be corrected automatically to play them with a more natural, easily viewable picture.

% iPod playback

Your iPod can be connected to the receiver’s USB terminal to play the music/video files on the iPod. Also, the iPod is charged when it is connected to the receiver.

% Direct Energy HD Amplifier

The “Direct Energy HD (High Fidelity Class D) amplifier” is an amplifier developed by Pioneer based on the latest high performance Class D amplifier and concentrating the essence of high sound quality design. This new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding performance with high sound quality and reproduces the latest in multi-channel digital contents.

% Dolby Pro Logic llz compatible

Adding a pair of speakers above the front left and right speakers adds expressiveness in the vertical direction to the previous horizontallyoriented sound field. The height channel strengthens the sound field’s sense of threedimensionality and air, producing presence and expansion.

% Internet Radio

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations.

% Bluetooth compatible

Using the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) lets you enjoy music files on an iPhone or other Bluetooth wireless technology device wirelessly.

% Auto Sound Retriever

The Auto Sound Retriever feature employs DSP technology to restore sound pressure and smooth jagged artifacts left over after compression.

% Easy setup using Advanced MCACC

The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup, which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ.

% RF two-way communications function

Using the CU-RF100, the information shown of the receiver’s display can be displayed on the remote control in your hands and you can operate the remote control without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing. ! The CU-RF100 is included with the SC-LX85,

sold separately with the SC-LX75.

Before you start

Checking what’s in the box

Please check that you’ve received the following supplied accessories:

In case of SC-LX85

! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m) ! Omni-directional remote control (CU-RF100) ! RF adapter ! IR blaster cable x2 ! AA/LR6 dry cell batteries x4 ! AM loop antenna ! FM wire antenna ! iPod cable ! Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)

— Quick start guide — CD-ROM (Operating instructions) — Connecting cable

! Power cord ! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) ! Warranty card ! Quick start guide

In case of SC-LX75

! Setup microphone (cable: 5 m) ! Remote control unit ! AAA size IEC R03 dry cell batteries (to confirm

system operation) x2

! AM loop antenna ! FM wire antenna ! iPod cable ! Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)

— Quick start guide — CD-ROM (Operating instructions) — Connecting cable

! Power cord ! CD-ROM (AVNavigator) ! Warranty card ! Quick start guide

Installing the receiver

! When installing this unit, make sure to put it

on a level and stable surface.

! Don’t install it on the following places:

— on a color TV (the screen may distort) — near a cassette deck (or close to a device that

gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.

— in direct sunlight — in damp or wet areas — in extremely hot or cold areas — in places where there is vibration or other

movement

— in places that are very dusty — in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as

a kitchen)

Loading the batteries

In case of SC-LX85

In case of SC-LX75

The batteries included with the unit are to check initial operations; they may not last over a long period. We recommend using alkaline batteries that have a longer life.

WARNING

! Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight

or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

CAUTION

Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:

! Never use new and old batteries together. ! Insert the plus and minus sides of the

batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case.

! Batteries with the same shape may have

different voltages. Do not use different batteries together.

! When disposing of used batteries, please

comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution’s rules that apply in your country/area.

Operating range of remote control unit

The remote control may not work properly if: ! There are obstacles between the remote

control and the receiver’s remote sensor.

! Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining

onto the remote sensor.

! The receiver is located near a device that is

emitting infrared rays.

! The receiver is operated simultaneously with

another infrared remote control unit.

30°

7 m

Note

By connecting an RF adapter to the RS-232C and CU-RF100 terminals (SC-LX85) / EXTENSION terminals (SC-LX75), the CU-RF100 omni-directional remote control can be used for RF two-way communications with the receiver. With RF two-way communications, the information of the receiver’s display can be displayed on the remote control in your hands and the remote control can be operated without worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing. For details, see

Flow for operating the receiver with RF two-way communications on page 7.

! The RF adapter and CU-RF100 omni-

directional remote control are included with the SC-LX85, sold separately with the SC-LX75.

! The maximum line-of-sight distance for RF

two-way communications is about 10 meters. This line-of-sight communications distance is a rough indication, and may differ according to the surrounding environment.

Flow for operating the receiver with RF two-way communications

SC-LX85 only

This remote control unit is set for operations using infrared signals upon shipment from the factory. To set it for RF operations, take the steps below.

1 Connecting the RF adapter to the RS232C and CU-RF100 terminals.

! Connecting the RF adapter on page 15

2 Setting the ‘RF Remote Setup’ to ‘ON’.

! RF Remote Setup on page 92

3 Pairing the RF adapter and remote control.

! Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on

page 71

01 Before you start

4 Setting ‘RECEIVER MAIN’ to ‘RF MODE’ for the remote control unit’s ‘IR/RF SELECT’ setting.

! Operating this receiver by RF communications

on page 71

About using AVNavigator (included CD-ROM)

The included AVNavigator CD-ROM contains Wiring Navi allowing you to easily make the receiver’s connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be completed easily simply by following the instructions on the screen to make the connections and settings. There are also other features enabling easy use of various functions, including an Interactive Manual that operates in association with the receiver, updating of various types of software, and MCACC Application that lets you check the MCACC measurement results on 3D graphs.

Installing AVNavigator

1 Load the included AVNavigator CD-ROM into your computer’s CD drive.

! The installation screen is displayed. Proceed

to step 2.

! If the installation screen does not appear,

double-click on the CD-ROM icon then start the installer (AVNV_XXX_xxx.exe).

2 Follow the instructions on the screen to install.

When “Finish” is selected, installation is completed.

3 Remove the included AVNavigator CD-ROM from the computer’s CD drive.

Handling the CD-ROM

Operating Environment

! This CD-ROM can be used with Microsoft®

Windows® XP/Vista/7.

! A browser is at times used for AVNavigator

functions. The supported browser is Microsoft Internet Explorer 6, 7 and 8. With other browsers, some functions may be limited or the display may not appear properly.

Also, even with a supported browser,

depending on the browser’s settings, some functions may be limited and the display may not appear properly.

Precautions For Use

! This CD-ROM is for use with a personal

computer. It cannot be used with a DVD player or music CD player. Attempting to play this CD-ROM with a DVD player or music CD player can damage speakers or cause impaired hearing due to the large volume.

License

! Please agree to the “Terms of Use” indicated

below before using this CD-ROM. Do not use if you are unwilling to consent to the terms of its use.

Also agree to the “License Agreement”

displayed when installing AVNavigator.

! Copyright to data provided on this CD-ROM

belongs to PIONEER CORPORATION. Unauthorized transfer, duplication, broadcast, public transmission, translation, sales, lending or other such matters that go beyond the scope of “personal use” or “citation” as defined by Copyright Law may be subject to punitive actions. Permission to use this CD-ROM is granted under license by PIONEER CORPORATION.

General Disclaimer

! PIONEER CORPORATION does not

guarantee the operation of this CD-ROM with

respect to personal computers using any of the applicable OS. In addition, PIONEER CORPORATION is not liable for any damages incurred as a result of use of this CD-ROM and is not responsible for any compensation. The names of private corporations, products and other entities described herein are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective firms.

Using AVNavigator

1 Click [AVNavigator] on the desktop to launch AVNavigator.

AVNavigator is launched and Wiring Navi starts up. The language selection screen appears. Follow the instructions on the screen to make the connections and automatic settings. Wiring Navi only starts up automatically the first time AVNavigator is launched.

2 Select and use the desired function.

AVNavigator includes the following functions:

! Wiring Navi – Guides you through

connections and initial settings in dialog fashion. High precision initial settings can be made easily.

! Interactive Manual – Automatically displays

the pages explaining the functions that have been operated on the receiver. It is also possible to operate the receiver from the Interactive Manual.

! Glossary – Displays glossary pages. ! MCACC Appli – Displays Advanced

MCACC measurement results vividly on the computer.

There are special operating instructions

for MCACC Application. These instructions are included in the AVNavigator Interactive Manual’s menus. Refer to them when using MCACC Application.

! Software Update – Allows various types of

software to be updated.

! Settings – Used to make various

AVNavigator settings.

! Detection – Used to detect the receiver.

Note

To use the AVNavigator of another model, first uninstall (delete) this receiver’s AVNavigator, then install the AVNavigator of the other model.

Deleting the AVNavigator

You can use the following method to uninstall (delete) the AVNavigator from your PC.

% Delete from the Control Panel of the PC.

From the Start menu, click “Program” d “PIONEER CORPORATION” d “AVNavigator(SC-LX85 or SC-LX75)” d “Uninstall”.

Controls and displays

Remote control (In case of SC-LX85)

This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.

2 3

MAIN

RECEIVER SOURCE

ZONE2

3 MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVD

USB

iPod

PHONO

AUX

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

STATUS

THX PQLSMPX MEMORY

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGMMENU

SIGNAL SEL SLEEP AUDIO

A.ATT

D.ACCESS

CLR

NET RADIO

HMG

OPTION

TUNER

MULTI CH

VIDEO

INPUT SELECTLIGHT

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

TUNE

TOOLS

ENTER

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

STANDARD ADV SURR

STEREO

DIMMER

SBch MCACC

HDMI OUT

CLASS

ENTER

HDMIDVR

ADAPTER

CD-R

VOL

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT GUIDE

RETURN

PTY SEARCH

INFO

DISP

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

! White – Receiver control, TV control ! Blue – Other controls (See pages 38, 39, 41, 43

and 68.)

1 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch

Switch to perform operations in the main zone, ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 (page 62).

2 u RECEIVER

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

3 MULTI OPERATION

Use this button to perform multi operations (page 67).

4 Input function buttons

Press to select control of other components (page 64). There are no AUX and CD-R inputs on this receiver, so the AUX and CD-R buttons cannot be used.

5 INPUT SELECT

Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input function (page 38).

6 Character display

This display shows information when transmitting control signals. The remote screen’s display differs when operating the receiver by sending infrared signals from the remote control and when operating it by RF two-way communications. For details, see Remote control display on page 10.

7 TV CONTROL buttons

These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector switch.

8 Receiver setting buttons

Set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER first to access:

! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Audio options (page 57).

! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Video options (page 59).

! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home

Menu (pages 34, 36, 54, 80 and 87).

! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the

current menu screen.

9 i/j/k/l/ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 80) and the Audio or Video options (page 57 or 59).

10 Receiver Control buttons

Set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER first to access:

! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver

settings (page 63).

! PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase

Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 48).

! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a

channel, then use k/l to adjust the level (page 89).

! THX – Press to select a Home THX listening

mode (page 46).

! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting

(page 56).

! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between

Auto Surround (page 45), Auto Level Control, Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 46).

! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback

mode (page 45).

! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding

and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:X, etc.) (page 45).

! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the

various surround modes (page 46).

! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal

(page 47).

! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep

mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 62).

! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display

(page 62).

! A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an

analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 62).

! SBch – With this receiver, SBch cannot be

used.

! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC

presets (page 47).

! HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output

terminal (page 62).

11 LIGHT

Press to turn on/off the illumination for the buttons.

! Press and hold in the

LIGHT button for 5

seconds to change the illumination mode 1 or 2. When set to LIGHT MODE 2 (default), the illumination only lights when the remote control LIGHT button is pressed. When switched to LIGHT MODE 1, the illumination lights whenever buttons are operated. Setting LIGHT MODE 1 will shorten the service life of the batteries.

12 Remote control operation selector switch

Set to RECEIVER to operate the receiver, TV or SOURCE to operate the TV or the source device.

When this switch is set to RECEIVER, the receiver can be controlled (used to select the white commands). Also use this switch to set up surround sound.

13 VOL +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

14 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

02 Controls and displays

MAIN SOURCEIR

iPod/USB

1 2 3 4

Remote control display

The display lights when a remote control operation is performed, then turns off after 20 seconds if no other operation is performed. When in the Remote Setup mode, the setup is canceled and the display turns off if no operation is performed for 1 minute (page 64).

Remote control display for infrared signal transmission (default)

Remote control display for RF twoway communications

1 2 3 4

MAIN

RCV CTRLRF

AV RECEIVER

VIDEO

+12.

0dB

1. Adv MCACC

! This is displayed when an RF adapter is

connected to the receiver and paired with the remote control. For details, see Using the RF communications function on page 70.

! Depending on the communications

environment, two-way communications may not work well and the remote control display may not reflect the receiver’s status.

10 11 12

1 Remote control operating zone indicator

This indicates which zone the remote control is currently set to operate. The display indicates the setting of the MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch.

Only when RF two-way communications:

The box display here indicates the communication status between this remote control unit and the receiver.

MAIN

(White box with black letters): Twoway communications are established and the receiver’s power is on.

MAIN

(Gray box with black letters): Two-way communications are established and the receiver’s power is off.

MAIN

(White letters only): Two-way communications are not working well. In this case, the area indicating the receiver’s status (12) is not displayed.

2 Remote control code sending indicator

This appears when signals are sent from the remote control.

3 Remote control code sending mode indicator

This indicates whether remote control codes are being sent by infrared (IR) signal or RF communications.

4 Remote control operation indicator

This indicates which operation mode the remote control is currently set to. The display indicates the setting of the remote control operation selector switch.

5 Input function and sending code indicator

This indicates what input function can currently be operated with the remote control. Also, when a button is pressed and its operation code is sent, the name of that code is displayed.

6 Area indicating the remote control’s status

7 Nothing displayed

Nothing is displayed here when the remote control code sending mode is set to IR.

8 Scroll indicators

Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.

9 Receiver input indicator

This indicates the input function currently selected for the receiver’s zone.

10 Receiver display

The same information as on the receiver’s display is displayed here.

11 Master volume display

This indicates the volume of the receiver’s main zone using, as an icon and in decibels

(dB). When the sound is muted, the displayed.

icon is

12 Area indicating the receiver’s status

RF adapter

Front

Rear

1 LED

2 SETTING

Use to pairing the RF adapter and remote control (page 71).

3 IR blaster terminals

Connect the IR blaster cable (page 71).

Controls and displays

Remote control (In case of SC-LX75)

This section explains how to operate the remote control for the receiver.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

2,3

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVDDVR

SAT

HMG

CDTV

USBOPTION

iPod

TUNER

VIDEO

RECEIVER

TV CTRL

SELECT

INPUT

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

TV CONTROL

VOL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

iPod CTRL

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

HDDDVD

DTVMPX PQLS

132

SIGNAL SEL

CH LEVEL A.ATT DIMMER

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

TOOLS

LIST

TUNE

ENTER

HOME

TUNE

PGM

STEREO STANDARD

CTRL STATUSTHX

PHASE

HDMI OUT

MCACC SLEEP

546

8079

CLASS

ENTER

RECEIVER

MUTE

PARAMETER

RETURN

ADV SURR

AUDIO

HDMI

ADPT

VIDEO

T.EDIT

INFO

DISP

LIGHT

12 13

PRESET

The remote has been conveniently color-coded according to component control using the following system:

! White – Receiver control, TV control ! Blue – Other controls (See pages 38, 39, 41, 43

and 78.)

1 u RECEIVER

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 MULTI OPERATION

Use this button to perform multi operations (page 76).

3 RCU SETUP

Use to input the preset code when making remote control settings and to set the remote control mode (page 74).

4 Input function buttons

Press to select control of other components (page 74). Use INPUT SELECT c/ d to select the input function (page 38).

5 TV CTRL

Set the preset code of your TV’s manufacturer when controlling the TV (page 75).

6 TV CONTROL buttons

These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CTRL button.

7 Receiver setting buttons

Press first to access:

! AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Audio options (page 57).

! VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the

Video options (page 59).

! HOME MENU – Use to access the Home

Menu (pages 34, 36, 54, 80 and 87).

! RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the

current menu screen.

8 i/j/k/l/ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system (see page 80) and the Audio or Video options (page 57 or 59).

9 Receiver Control buttons

Press first to access:

! AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between

Auto Surround (page 45), Auto Level Control, Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 46).

! STEREO – Press to select stereo playback

mode (page 45).

! STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding

and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:X, etc.) (page 45).

! ADV SURR – Use to switch between the

various surround modes (page 46).

! THX – Press to select a Home THX listening

mode (page 46).

! PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off Phase

Control or Full Band Phase Control (page 48).

! STATUS – Press to check selected receiver

settings (page 63).

! PQLS – Press to select the PQLS setting

(page 56).

! HDMI OUT – Switch the HDMI output

terminal (page 62).

! SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal

(page 47).

! MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC

presets (page 47).

! SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep

mode and select the amount of time before sleep (page 62).

! CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a

channel, then use k/l to adjust the level (page 89).

! A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an

analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 62).

! DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display

(page 62).

10 MULTI-ZONE select buttons

Switch to perform operations in ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 (page 61).

11 Remote control LED

Lights when a command is sent from the remote control.

12 OPTION

The preset codes of desired devices can be registered in the remote control and button operations can be registered using the learning mode.

Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to select the white commands). Switch to perform operations in the main zone. Also use this button to set up surround sound.

14 MASTER VOLUME +/–

Use to set the listening volume.

15 MUTE

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

16 LIGHT

Press to turn on/off the illumination for the buttons. The way the buttons light can be selected from four modes (page 76).

02 Controls and displays

Display

21 3 8654 107 11 13 14

AUTO

L C R

SL SR

HDMI

XL XR

STANDARD

SLEEP

LFE

DIGITAL ANALOG

AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT

PROLOGIC x THX ADV.SURROUND

SP AB

1 Signal indicators

Light to indicate the currently selected input signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input signal automatically (page 47).

2 Program format indicators

Light to indicate the channels to which digital signals are being input.

! L/R – Left front/Right front channel ! C – Center channel ! SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround

channel

! LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( ))

indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)

! XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones

above

! XC – Either one channel other than the ones

above, the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag

3 Digital format indicators

Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format is detected.

! 2 DIGITAL – Lights with Dolby Digital

decoding.

! 2 DIGITAL PLUS – Lights with Dolby Digital

Plus decoding.

! 2 TrueHD – Lights with Dolby TrueHD

decoding.

! DTS – Lights with DTS decoding. ! DTS HD – Lights with DTS-HD decoding.

DIGITAL PLUS

TrueHD

DTS HD ES 96/24

MSTR

TUNER PHONO

iPod

FULL BAND

PQLS

DVD

20 2116 17 18 19

ALC

DVR

DSD PCM MULTI-ZONE S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX

! 96/24 – Lights with DTS 96/24 decoding. ! DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream

Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.

! PCM – Lights during playback of PCM

signals.

! MSTR – Lights during playback of DTS-HD

Master Audio signals.

4 MULTI-ZONE

Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active (page 61).

5 FULL BAND

Lights when the Full Band Phase Control is switched on (page 48).

6 Listening mode indicators

! AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto

Surround feature is switched on (page 45).

! ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level

control) mode is selected (page 45).

! STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/Pure

Direct is selected (page 46).

! ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of

the Advanced Surround modes has been selected (page 46).

! STANDARD – Lights when one of the

Standard Surround modes is switched on (page 45).

! THX – Lights when one of the Home THX

modes is selected (page 46).

ATT

OVER

VIDEO HMG

HDMI

TUNED RDS STEREO MONO

[ 2 ]

USB

[ 3 ]

7 (PHASE CONTROL)

Lights when the Phase Control (page 47) or Full Band Phase Control (page 48) is switched on.

129

8 Analog signal indicators

[ 4 ]

Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog signal (page 62).

9 PQLS

Lights when the PQLS feature is active (page

56).

10 Tuner indicators

! TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being

received.

! STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM

broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.

! MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set

17 SLEEP

Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page

62).

18 Matrix decoding format indicators

! 2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2

Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding (page

45).

19 S.RTRV

Lights when the Auto Sound Retriever function is active (page 57).

20 Character display

Displays various system information.

21 Remote control mode indicator

Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.) (page 92)

using MPX.

! RDS – Lights when an RDS broadcast is

received.

Lights when the sound is muted.

12 SOUND

Lights when the DIALOG E (Dialog Enhancement) or TONE (tone controls) features is selected (page 57).

13 Master volume level

Shows the overall volume level. “---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB” indicates the maximum level.

14 Input function indicators

Light to indicate the input function you have selected.

15 Scroll indicators

Light when there are more selectable items when making the various settings.

16 Speaker indicators

Lights to indicate the current speaker system using SPEAKERS (page 61).

Controls and displays

Front panel

1 2 4

ADVANCED

MCACC

FL OFF

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

8910 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 1918 20 21

1 u STANDBY/ON

This switches between standby and on for this receiver.

2 INPUT SELECTOR dial

Use to select an input function.

3 Indicators

! ADVANCED MCACC – Lights when EQ is

set to ON in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu (page 57).

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

BAND

MULTI-ZONE

CONTROL ON/OFF

PHONES

SPEAKERS

PRESETPRESET

TUNER EDIT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

HOME MENU RETURN

iPod iPhone iPadHDMI

MCACC

SETUP MIC

iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT HOME THX

USB

5V 2.1 A

iPod iPhone iPad

ADVANCED SURROUND

STANDARD

SURROUND

HDMI 3 INPUT

! FL OFF – Lights when “off” (nothing

displayed) is selected with the display’s dimmer adjustment (page 62).

! HDMI – Blinks when connecting an HDMI-

equipped component; lights when the component is connected (page 25).

! iPod iPhone iPad – Lights to indicate iPod/

iPhone/iPad is connected (page 31).

4 Character display

See Display on page 12.

MASTER VOLUME

5 Remote sensor

Receives the signals from the remote control (page 7).

6 MASTER VOLUME dial

7 Front panel controls

To access the front panel controls, catch the sides of the door with your fingers and pull forward.

INPUT SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

MASTER VOLUME

8 AUDIO PARAMETER

Use to access the Audio options (page 57).

9 i/j/k/l (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER

Use the arrow buttons when setting up your Home Menu. Use TUNE i/j to find radio fre- quencies and use PRESET k/l to find preset stations (page 41).

10 VIDEO PARAMETER

Use to access the Video options (page 59).

11 SPEAKERS

Use to change the speaker terminal (page 61).

12 MULTI-ZONE controls

If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (page

29) use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone (page 61).

13 iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Change the receiver’s input to the iPod and enable iPod operations on the iPod (page 39).

14 Listening mode buttons

! AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –

Switches between Auto Surround (page 45), Auto Level Control, Optimum Surround mode and Stream Direct mode (page 46).

! STANDARD SURROUND – Press for

Standard decoding and to switch various modes (2 Pro Logic, Neo:X, Stereo etc.) (page 45).

! ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch

between the various surround modes (page

46).

! HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX

listening mode (page 46).

15 HOME MENU

Use to access the Home Menu (pages 34, 36, 54, 80 and 87).

16 RETURN

Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.

17 TUNER controls

! BAND – Switches between AM and FM radio

bands (page 41).

! TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE i/j, PRESET

k/l and ENTER to memorize and name

stations for recall (page 41).

18 PHONES jack

Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.

19 MCACC SETUP MIC jack

Use to connect the supplied microphone (page

34).

20 iPod iPhone iPad USB terminals

Use to connect your Apple iPod/iPhone/iPad as an audio and video source (page 31), or connect a USB device for audio and photo playback (page 31).

21 HDMI input connector

Use for connection to a compatible HDMI device (Video camera, etc.) (page 31).

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting your equipment

This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This chapter explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.

CAUTION

! Before making or changing the connections, switch off the power and disconnect the power cord

from the power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.

! When making connections, also keep the power cords of the devices being connected unplugged

from the power outlets.

! Depending on the device being connected (amplifier, receiver, etc.), the methods of connection

and terminal names may differ from the explanations in this manual. Also refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices.

Important

Illustration shows the SC-LX85, however connections for the SC-LX75 are the same except where noted.

Rear panel

SC-LX85

ASSIGNABLE

(

( BDR

(

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

)

DVD

DVR/

)

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

IN1IN

ZONE 2

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

ZONE 3

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

(VIDEO)

SPEAKERS

DVD

IN IN IN IN

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

PHONO

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

VIDEO

SIGNAL

GND

OUT

CD IN

AUDIO

(DVD)

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

A A

FRONTCENTER

RL RLRLRLRL

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN1IN

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.6 A MAX

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(CD)(

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

FRONT WIDE /

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

(

)

Single

CENTERFRONT SURROUND SURR BACK

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

)

SURROUND

AC IN

SURROUND BACK

SC-LX75

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVD

(

DVR/

)

BDR

(

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

RS-232C

EXTENSION

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

)

ANTENNA

AM LOOP

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

OUT

IN1IN

)

ZONE 2

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

ZONE 3

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

(VIDEO)

SPEAKERS

DVD

IN IN IN IN

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

PHONO

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

VIDEO

SIGNAL

GND

OUT

CD IN

AUDIO

(DVD)

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

A A

FRONTCENTER

RL RLRLRLRL

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN1IN

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

(

OUTPUT

5 V

)

0.6 A MAX

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(CD)(

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

)

Single

FRONT WIDE /

ASSIGNABLE

PRE OUT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

(

)

VIDEO

)

SURROUND

AC IN

SURROUND BACK

(

)

Single

Note

! The input functions below are assigned by default to the receiver’s different input terminals. Refer to

The Input Setup menu on page 36 to change the assignments if other connections are used.

Input function

HDMI Digital Component

(BD)

DVD IN 5 COAX-1 IN 1

TV/SAT OPT-1

DVR/BDR IN 6 OPT-2 IN 2

VIDEO IN 4 OPT-3 IN 3

HDMI 1 IN 1

HDMI 2 IN 2

HDMI 3

(front panel)

(

)

Single

CD COAX-2

IN 3

! SC-LX75 only: The CU-RF100 omni-directional remote control

(separately sold) can be connected to the RS-232C and EXTENSION terminals. Using the CU-RF100 lets you display the receiver’s display information on the remote control display in your hands and operate it without

Input Terminals

RS-232C

EXTENSION

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

OUT OUT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

150 mA MAX

CONT

worrying about obstacles or the direction in which the remote control is pointing.

Connecting your equipment

(

DVR/

Connecting the RF adapter

SC-LX85 only

Two-way communications between the receiver and remote control are possible by connecting the included RF adapter to the RS-232C and CU-RF100 terminals on the receiver. For the features of two-way communications and detailed usage instructions, see Using the RF communications function on page 70.

)

BDR

(

)

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX

RF adapter

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

OUT

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

CONTROL

TV/SAT VIDE

DVD

IN IN IN

SPEAKERS

Determining the speakers’ application

This unit is equipped with speaker terminals for

[A] 9.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) connection

*Default setting

! Speaker System setting: 9.1ch FH/FW

[B] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection

! Speaker System setting: 7.1ch + Speaker B

9 channels, allowing users to select a variety of speaker layouts/usage patterns according to their tastes. The terminals to which the speakers should be connected differ according to the speaker layout/usage pattern. Select one speaker layout/usage pattern before connecting the speakers. For instructions on connections, see Installing your speaker system on page 19. ! Be sure to connect speakers to the front left

FHL

SW 2

FWL

and right channels (L and R).

! It is also possible to only connect one of the

surround back speakers (SB) or neither.

! If you have two subwoofers, the second

subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2 terminal. Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.

Important

! The Speaker System setting must be made if

you use any of the connections shown below other than [A] (see Speaker system setting on page 87).

! The speakers from which sound is output

can be switched according to the speaker layout/usage pattern (sound is not necessarily output from all connected speakers). Use the SPEAKERS button to switch the speakers from which sound is output. For details, see

A 9.2 ch surround system connects the left and right front speakers (L/R), the center speaker (C), the left and right front height speakers (FHL/FHR), the left and right front wide speakers (FWL/FWR), the left and right surround speakers (SL/SR), the left and right surround back speakers (SBL/SBR), and the subwoofers (SW 1/SW 2). It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the front wide speakers. This surround system produces a more true-tolife sound from above. The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button. For details, see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61.

FHR

FWR

FHL

SBR

SBL

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The same connections also allow for 9.2-channel surround sound in the main zone when not using the B speakers. The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button. For details, see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61.

FHR

SW 1

SBL

SBR

Speaker B

Switching the speaker terminals on page 61.

03 Connecting your equipment

[C] 7.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

! Speaker System setting: 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 7.2-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

SW 1

SBL

SBR

[D] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Speaker System setting: 7.1ch + ZONE 2 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.) This speaker layout/usage pattern provides

7.2-channel playback using the surround back channels in the main zone. To achieve 7.2-channel playback using the front height and front wide channels with ZONE 2 connections, see [E].

SW 1

SBL

ZONE 2

Main zone

SBR

Sub zone

[E] 7.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Speaker System setting:

7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 7.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.) This speaker layout/usage pattern provides

7.2-channel playback using the front height and front wide channels in the main zone. To achieve 7.2-channel playback using the surround back channels with ZONE 2 connections, see [D]. It is not possible to produce sound simultaneously from the front height speakers and the front wide speakers. The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button. For details, see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61.

FWL

FHR

FHL

SW 1

Main zone

FWR

[F] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Speaker System setting:

5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

Front Bi-Amp

Main zone

ZONE 2

SW 1

Sub zone

ZONE 2

Sub zone

Connecting your equipment

[G] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2/ZONE 3 connection (Multi Zone)

! Speaker System setting: 5.1ch + ZONE 2+3 With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback on another component in ZONE 2 and ZONE3. (The selection of input devices is limited.)

SW 1

ZONE 2

Main zone

ZONE 3

Sub zone

[H] 5.2 channel surround system & Speaker B Bi-amping connection

SC-LX85 only

! Speaker System setting:

5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp

With these connections you can simultaneously enjoy 5.2-channel surround sound in the main zone with stereo playback of the same sound on the B speakers. The B speakers can be biamped to achieve high quality sound. The speakers from which sound is output can be switched using the SPEAKERS button. For details, see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61.

Speaker B Bi-Amp

SW 1

[I] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Surround Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

SC-LX85 only

! Speaker System setting:

5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp

Bi-amping connection of the front and surround speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

SW 1

Surround Bi-Amp

[J] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Center Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

SC-LX85 only ! Speaker System setting: 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp Bi-amping connection of the front and center speakers for high sound quality with 5.2-channel surround sound.

Front Bi-Amp

Center Bi-Amp

SW 1

Other speaker connections

! Your favorite speaker connections can be

selected even if you have fewer than 5.2 speakers (except front left/right speakers).

! When not connecting a subwoofer, connect

speakers with low frequency reproduction capabilities to the front channel. (The subwoofer’s low frequency component is played from the front speakers, so the speakers could be damaged.)

! After connecting, be sure to conduct the

Full Auto MCACC (speaker environment setting) procedure. See Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34.

Placing the speakers

Refer to the chart below for placement of the speakers you intend to connect.

FHL

2SW 1

FWL

30 30

120 120

SBL

! Place the surround speakers at 120º from

the center. If you, (1) use the surround back speaker, and, (2) don’t use the front height speakers / front wide speakers, we recommend placing the surround speaker right beside you.

! If you intend to connect only one surround

back speaker, place it directly behind you.

! Place the left and right front height speakers

at least one meter directly above the left and right front speakers.

THX speaker system setup

If you are using a THX certified subwoofer, use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer. See also THX Audio Setting on page 89 to make the settings that will give you the best sound experience when using the Home THX modes (page 46).

FHR

FWR

SBR

03 Connecting your equipment

Some tips for improving sound quality

Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system. ! The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.

Ideally, the other speakers should be at about ear-level when you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended.

! For the best stereo effect, place the front

speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.

! If you’re going to place speakers around your

CRT TV, use shielded speakers or place the speakers at a sufficient distance from your CRT TV.

! If you’re using a center speaker, place the

front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a narrower angle.

! Place the center speaker above or below the

TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers.

! It is best to angle the speakers towards the

listening position. The angle depends on the size of the room. Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.

! Surround and surround back speakers should

be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and tilted slightly downward. Make sure the speakers don’t face each other. For DVDAudio, the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback.

! Try not to place the surround speakers farther

away from the listening position than the front and center speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect.

Connecting the speakers

Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves.

CAUTION

! These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS

LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric

shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.

! Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is

twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal. If core wires touch each other or come in contact with the rear panel or the metal parts of other speaker terminals, the protective circuit may be activated, setting the power to the standby mode.

Bare wire connections

CAUTION

Make sure that all speakers are securely installed. This not only improves sound quality, but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes.

1 Twist exposed wire strands together.

2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.

3 Tighten terminal.

12 3

10 mm

Note

! Please refer to the manual that came with

your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers.

! Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.

It is not possible to connect using speaker cables.

! If you have two subwoofers, the second

Bi-amping your speakers

Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance. Your speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.

Bi-amp compatible speaker

High

Low

ZONE2 OUT

RS-232C

CU-RF100

( 150 mA MAX

OUTPUT 5 V

AM LOOP

ANTENNA IR

OUT

)

FRONT CENTER

SPEAKERS

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

CONTROL

CENTER

AUDIO

FRONT HEIGHT

CAUTION

! Most speakers with both High and Low

terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low terminals. These must be removed when you are bi-amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for more information.

! If your speakers have a removable crossover

network, make sure you do not remove it for biamping. Doing so may damage your speakers.

Bi-wiring your speakers

Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they support bi-amping. ! With these connections, the Speaker System

setting makes no difference.

CAUTION

! Don’t connect different speakers from the

same terminal in this way.

! When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions for

bi-amping shown above.

% To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.

Connecting your equipment

Installing your speaker system

At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).

[A] 9.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) connection

! If necessary, select ‘9.1ch FH/FW’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this. ! When only connecting one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)

terminals.

Front left

SURROUND BACK

Front wide left

(

)

Single

Front wide right

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

ZONE2

RS-232C

Front right

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

(

)

DVD

(

DVR/

)

BDR

(

)

VIDEO

OUT

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

150 mA MAX

IN1IN

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

Front height right

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

(VIDEO)

DVD

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

IN IN IN IN

OUT

SPEAKERS

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

Front height left

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

OUT 1

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

A A

RL RLRLRLRL

MONITOR

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

FRONT CENTER

VIDEO

SIGNAL

OUT

CD IN

AUDIO

(CONTROL)

COAXIAL

GND

FRONT

FRONT HEIGHT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTER

LAN

(

)

10/100

)

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

(

)

Single

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

FRONT WIDE /

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

AC IN

)

[B] 7.2 channel surround system & Speaker B connection

! Select ‘7.1ch + Speaker B’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this. ! When only connecting one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)

terminals.

Front left

SURROUND BACK

Speaker B - left

(

)

Single

Surround left

Speaker B - right

Front right

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVD

(

DVR/

BDR

(

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

Surround right

HDMI

1 6

YPBP

)

IN1IN

COMPONENT VIDEO

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

ZONE 2

(VIDEO)

ZONE 3

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

Front height right

Front height left

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.6 A MAX

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

(

)

Single

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

FRONT WIDE /

)

SURROUND

AC IN

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

DVR/BDR

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

OUT

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

VIDEO

COAXIAL

SIGNAL

GND

FRONT

CD IN

AUDIO

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

(DVD)

BD IN

DVD

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

IN IN IN IN

OUTOUT

A A

FRONT CENTER

RL RLRLRLRL

SPEAKERS

Surround back right Surround back left

Surround right

Surround back right Surround back left

Surround left

03 Connecting your equipment

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

GND

SIGNAL

CD IN

DVD

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

OUT 2

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2 OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

(CD)(

DVD

)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

VIDEO

)

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

)

ADAPTER PORT

CU-RF100

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

10/100

)

LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

RL RLRLRLRL

(

Single

)

( Single

)

SPEAKERS

FRONT WIDE /

FRONT HEIGHT

A A

AC IN

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

VIDEO

AUDIO

MONITOR

OUT

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

SUBWOOFER

High

Low

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

High

Low

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

Surround left

Surround back right Surround back left

Surround right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Front right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Front left

[C] 7.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

! Select ‘7.1ch Front Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this. ! When only connecting one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)

terminals.

[D] 7.2 channel surround system (Surround back) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Select ‘7.1ch + ZONE 2’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this. ! When only connecting one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L (Single)

terminals.

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2 - left

(

)

Single

Surround left

ZONE 2 - right

Surround right

Front right

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

YPBP

(

)

DVD

(

DVR/

)

BDR

(

)

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

IN1IN

COMPONENT VIDEO

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

FM UNBAL 75

CONTROL

OUT

ZONE 2

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

)

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

(

)

Single

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT MULT I CH IN

FRONT WIDE /

)

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

SURROUND

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

(VIDEO)

DVD

ZONE 3

IN IN IN IN

OUT

SPEAKERS

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

(DVD)

BD IN

A A

FRONT CENTER

RL RLRLRLRL

OUT 1

(DVR/BDR)

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

MONITOR

OUT

(CONTROL)

VIDEO

COAXIAL

SIGNAL

GND

FRONT

CD IN

AUDIO

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

Surround back right Surround back left

Front left

AC IN

Connecting your equipment

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

GND

SIGNAL

CD IN

DVD

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

OUT 2

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2 OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

(CD)(

DVD

)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

VIDEO

)

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

)

ADAPTER PORT

CU-RF100

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

10/100

)

LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

RL RLRLRLRL

(

Single

)

( Single

)

SPEAKERS

FRONT WIDE /

FRONT HEIGHT

A A

AC IN

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

VIDEO

AUDIO

MONITOR

OUT

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

SUBWOOFER

High

Low

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

High

Low

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

Surround leftSurround right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Front right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Front left

ZONE 2 - right

ZONE 2 - left

[E] 7.2 channel surround system (Front height/Front wide) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Select ‘7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this.

Front wide right

Front right

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

ASSIGNABLE

YPBP

(

)

DVD

(

DVR/

)

MONITOR

ZONE2

RS-232C

BDR

(

VIDEO

OUT

)

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

Front height right

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

IN1IN

(VIDEO)

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

IN IN IN IN

OUT

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

SPEAKERS

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

CONTROL

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

OUT

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

VIDEO

SIGNAL

GND

CD IN

AUDIO

(DVD)

BD IN

A A

FRONT CENTER

RL RLRLRLRL

ZONE 2 - right

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN1IN DVD

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

Front height left

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

OPTICAL

(CD)(

)

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

)

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

(

)

Single

PRE OUT MULT I CH IN

FRONT WIDE /

ZONE 2 - left

)

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

Front left

AC IN

SURROUND BACK

Front wide left

(

)

Single

Surround leftSurround right

[F] 5.2 channel surround system & Front Bi-amping connection (High quality surround) & ZONE 2 connection (Multi Zone)

! Select ‘5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this.

03 Connecting your equipment

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

GND

SIGNAL

CD IN

DVD

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

OUT 2

PRE OUT MULT I CH IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2 OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTERFRONTSURRO UNDSURR BACK

(CD)(

DVD

)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

VIDEO

)

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

)

ADAPTER PORT

CU-RF100

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

10/100

)

LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

RL RLRLRLRL

(

Single

)

( Single

)

SPEAKERS

FRONT WIDE /

FRONT HEIGHT

A A

AC IN

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

VIDEO

AUDIO

MONITOR

OUT

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

SUBWOOFER

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

ZONE 3 - right

Front right

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

Front left

Surround leftSurround right

ZONE 3 - left

ZONE 2 - right

ZONE 2 - left

[G] 5.2 channel surround system & ZONE 2/ZONE 3 connection (Multi Zone)

! Select ‘5.1ch + ZONE 2+3’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this.

[H] 5.2 channel surround system & Speaker B Bi-amping connection

SC-LX85 only

! Select ‘5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this.

Front right Front left

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

IN1IN

(VIDEO)

ZONE 2

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

BD IN

DVD

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

ZONE 3

OUT

IN IN IN IN

A A

RL RLRLRLRL

SPEAKERS

12 V TRIGGER

High

Low

Bi-amp compatible speaker Speaker B right

ASSIGNABLE

(

MONITOR

ZONE2

RS-232C

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

DVD

(

DVR/

)

BDR

VIDEO

OUT

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

1 6

YPBP

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

FRONT CENTER

MONITOR

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

OUT 1

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

(CONTROL)

VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN1IN

SIGNAL

GND

OUT

CD IN

AUDIO

Bi-amp compatible

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

speaker

Speaker B left

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.6 A MAX

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(CD)(

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

(

)

Single

PRE OUT MULT I CH IN

FRONT WIDE /

(

VIDEO

LAN

(

10/100

)

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.1 A MAX

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

High

Low

AC IN

SURROUND BACK

(

)

Single

Surround leftSurround right

Connecting your equipment

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

GND

SIGNAL

CD IN

DVD

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

OUT 2

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2 OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

(CD)(

DVD

)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

VIDEO

)

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

)

ADAPTER PORT

CU-RF100

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

10/100

)

LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

RL RLRLRLRL

(

Single

)

( Single

)

SPEAKERS

FRONT WIDE /

FRONT HEIGHT

A A

AC IN

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

VIDEO

AUDIO

MONITOR

OUT

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

SUBWOOFER

High

Low

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

High

Low

High

Low

High

Low

Center Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Front right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Front left

Bi-amp compatible speaker Surround right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Surround left

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VIDEOINPHONO

GND

SIGNAL

CD IN

DVD

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

OUT 2

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

(CD)(

DVD

)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

VIDEO

)

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

)

ADAPTER PORT

CU-RF100

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

10/100

)

LAN

(

OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

RL RLRLRLRL

(

Single

)

(

Single

)

SPEAKERS

FRONT WIDE /

FRONT HEIGHT

A A

AC IN

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

VIDEO

AUDIO

MONITOR

OUT

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

SUBWOOFER

High

Low

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

LINE LEVEL

INPUT

High

Low

High

Low

Subwoofer 2Subwoofer 1

Surround leftSurround right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Front right

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Front left

Bi-amp compatible speaker

Center

[I] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Surround Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

SC-LX85 only

! Select ‘5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this.

[J] 5.2 channel surround system & Front and Center Bi-amping connection (High quality surround)

SC-LX85 only

! Select ‘5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp’ from the Speaker System menu. See Speaker system setting on page 87 to do this.

03 Connecting your equipment

About the audio connection

Types of cables and terminals

HDMI HD audio

Digital (Coaxial)Conventional digital audio

Digital (Optical)

Sound signal priority

RCA (Analog)

(White/Red)

! With an HDMI cable, video and audio signals

can be transferred in high quality over a single cable.

Transferable audio signals

Conventional analog audio

About the video converter

The video converter ensures that all video sources are output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only exception is HDMI: since this resolution cannot be downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI output when connecting this video source. If several video components are assigned to the same input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 36), the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, then composite (in that order).

Terminal for connection with source device

HDMI IN HDMI OUT

YPBP

High picture quality

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Video signals can be output

Terminal for connection with TV monitor

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

Note

! If the video signal does not appear on your

TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 59) OFF.

! The signal input resolutions that can be

converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.

! Only signals with an input resolution

of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the composite MONITOR OUT terminals.

! For optimal video performance, THX

recommends switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 59) OFF.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

About HDMI

The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio. This receiver incorporates High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI®) technology. This receiver supports the functions described below through HDMI connections. ! Digital transfer of uncompressed video

(contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24, 1080p/60, etc.))

! 3D signal transfer ! Deep Color signal transfer ! x.v.Color signal transfer ! ARC (Audio Return Channel) ! Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital

audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8 channels

! Input of the following digital audio formats:

— Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS, High

bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio), DVD-Audio, CD, SACD (DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD

! Synchronized operation with components

using the Control with HDMI function (see Control with HDMI function on page 54)

Note

! An HDMI connection can only be made

with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIdHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

! If you connect a component that

is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front panel display. Some components that

are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.

! Depending on the component you have

connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.

! This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital

Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.

! Use a High Speed HDMI

cable. If an HDMI cable other than a High Speed HDMI® cable is used, it may not work properly.

! When an HDMI cable with a built-in equalizer

is connected, it may not operate properly.

! Signal transfer is only possible when

connected to a compatible component.

! HDMI format digital audio transmissions

require a longer time to be recognized. Due to this, interruption in the audio may occur when switching between audio formats or beginning playback.

! Turning on/off the device connected to this

unit’s HDMI OUT terminal during playback, or disconnecting/connecting the HDMI cable during playback, may cause noise or interrupted audio.

HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

“x.v.Color” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

Connecting your equipment

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VIDEO

PHONO

GND

SIGNAL

CD IN

DVD

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

OUT 2

PRE OUTMULTI CH IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/

BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHTF WIDE

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

(CD)(

DVD

)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

VIDEO

)

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

)

ADAPTER PORT

CU-RF100

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

10/100

)

LAN

(

OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

FRONTCENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

RL RLRLRLRL

(

Single

)

( Single

)

SPEAKERS

FRONT WIDE /

FRONT HEIGHT

A A

AC IN

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

VIDEO

AUDIO

MONITOR

OUT

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

SUBWOOFER

HDMI IN

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

(ARC)

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

DVD player, etc.

Select one Select one

Connecting your TV and playback components

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray Disc player (BD), etc.), you can connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable. If the TV and playback components support the Control with HDMI feature, the convenient Control with HDMI functions can be used (see Control with HDMI function on page 54).

Other HDMI/DVIequipped component

HDMI OUT HDMI OUT

! When connecting to an HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal, switch the

HDMI output setting to HDMI OUT 2 or HDMI OUT ALL. See Switching the HDMI output on page

62.

! For input components, connections other than HDMI connections are also possible (see

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output on page 25).

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

cables.

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC

(Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 54).

HDMI/DVI-compatible Blu-ray Disc player

HDMI IN

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTIC AL

Select one

(ARC)

IN1IN

ZONE 2

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

(VIDEO)

ZONE 3

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

YPBP

(

)

DVD

(

DVR/

)

BDR

(

)

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

150 mA MAX

OUT 1

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

BD IN

VIDEO

SIGNAL

MONITOR

GND

OUT

TV/SAT VIDEO

DVD

IN IN IN IN

SPEAKERS

PHONO

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

CD IN

AUDIO

FRONTCENTER

RL RLRLR

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

(CONTROL)

ASSIGNABLE

COAXIAL

IN1IN

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHTF WIDE CENTFRONT

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.6 A MAX

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3O

(CD)(

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

(

)

Single

FRONT WIDE /

PRE OUT

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

This connection is required in order to listen to the sound of the

ADAPTE

TV over the

(

OUTP

LAN

0.1 A

(

)

10/100

(

VIDEO

receiver.

)

SUBWO

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component with no HDMI output) to the receiver.

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

cables (page 25).

— When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC

! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you

connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

03 Connecting your equipment

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN IN IN

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VIDEO

PHONO

GND

SIGNAL

CD IN

DVD

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

OUT 2

PRE OUTMULTI CH IN

SUBWOOFER

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTERFRONT SURROUND SURR BACK

(CD)(

DVD

)

COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

VIDEO

)

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

)

ADAPTER PORT

CU-RF100

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

10/100

)

LAN

(

OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

RL RLRLRLRL

(

Single

)

( Single

)

SPEAKERS

FRONT WIDE /

FRONT HEIGHT

A A

AC IN

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

VIDEO

AUDIO

MONITOR

OUT

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

SUBWOOFER

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

ANALOG

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

VIDEO IN

HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc.

Select one

Connecting your TV with no HDMI input

This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback component) to the receiver. ! With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected with

an HDMI cable. Connect the receiver and TV using the same type of video cable as used to connect the receiver and player.

DVD player, etc.

Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

! Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an HDMI cable

! If you want to listen to the sound of the TV over the receiver, connect the receiver and TV with audio

! If you use an optical digital audio cable, you’ll need to tell the receiver which digital input you

to input video signals.Depending on the video component, it may not be possible to output signals connected by HDMI and other methods simultaneously, and it may be necessary to make output settings. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your component for more information.

cables (page 25).

connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

IN1IN

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

YPBP

(

)

DVD

(

DVR/

)

BDR

(

)

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

AM LOOP

FM UNBAL 75

ANTENNA

OUT

CU-RF100

OUT

)

CONTROL

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

Select one Select one

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

(VIDEO)

DVD

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

IN IN IN IN

OUT

SPEAKERS

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

OUT

PHONO

DVR/BDR

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

VIDEO

COAXIAL

SIGNAL

GND

FRONT

CD IN

AUDIO

(DVD)

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

OUTOUT

FRONTCENTER

RL RLRLR

HDMI OUT

ASSIGNABLE

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

(

OUTPUT

5 V

)

0.6 A MAX

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

(

)

DVD

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR

(

)

Single

FRONT WIDE /

AUDIO OUT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

)

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

(

)

VIDEO

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUTMULTI

SURROUND

ANALOG

Connecting an HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder and other video sources

This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices, including HDD/DVD recorders and BD recorders. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 36).

! In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback

only) (page 62).

! If your HDD/DVD recorder, BD recorder, etc., is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we

recommend connecting it to the receiver’s HDMI DVR/BDR IN terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 25).

Connecting your equipment

Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other set-top box

Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

STB

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

IN1IN

(VIDEO)

DVD

ZONE 3

IN IN IN IN

OUT

SPEAKERS

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

(

DVD

(

DVR/ BDR

(

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

YPBP

)

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX

COMPONENT VIDEO

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

ZONE 2

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

! If your set-top box is equipped with an HDMI output terminal, we recommend connecting it to the

receiver’s HDMI IN 1 or IN 2 terminal. When doing so, also connect the receiver and TV by HDMI (see Connecting using HDMI on page 25).

Select one

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

(DVD)

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

DVR/BDR

OUTOUT

A A

FRONT CENTER

RL RLRLRLRL

PHONO

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

SIGNAL

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

COAXIAL

GND

FRONT

CD IN

COAXIALOPTIC AL

DIGITAL OUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

)

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

( Single

FRONT WIDE /

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

)

SURROUND

AC IN

SURROUND BACK

(

)

Single

Connecting other audio components

This receiver has both digital and analog inputs, allowing you to connect audio components for playback. When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 36).

MD, DAT, etc.Turntable

Select one

AUDIO OUT

ANALOG

ASSIGNABLE

(

MONITOR

ZONE2

RS-232C

(

DVD

(

DVR/

BDR

VIDEO

OUT

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

)

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

IN1IN

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

ZONE 2

(VIDEO)

ZONE 3

OUT

SPEAKERS

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

DVR/BDR

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

PHONO

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

VIDEO

COAXIAL

SIGNAL

GND

OUT

FRONT

CD IN

AUDIO

(DVD)

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

DVD

OUTOUT

IN IN IN IN

A A

FRONTCENTER

RL RLRLRLRL

! If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD

inputs instead.

! You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s digital out jack.

DIGITAL OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

(

OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHTF WIDE

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

)

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

( Single

FRONT WIDE /

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUTMULTI CH IN

)

SURROUND

DIGITAL IN

OPTICAL

AC IN

SURROUND BACK

(

)

Single

03 Connecting your equipment

Connecting the multichannel analog inputs

SC-LX85 only

For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending on whether your player supports surround back channels). Make sure that the player is set to output multichannel analog audio.

DVD player, etc.

VIDEO OUT

VIDEO

ZONE 2

UNBAL 75

NTROL

ZONE 3

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

(VIDEO)

SPEAKERS

DVR/BDR

(DVR/BDR)

MONITOR

PHONO

OUT 1 (CONTROL)

VIDEO

COAXIAL

SIGNAL

GND

OUT

FRONT

CD IN

AUDIO

(DVD)

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEO

DVD

IN IN IN IN

OUTOUT

A A

FRONTCENTER

RL RLRLRLRL

! If there is a single surround back output, connect it to the SURR BACK L jack on this receiver. ! To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround channel, not the

surround back channel.

FRONT

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

(

OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN3OUT

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

CENTER

OUTPUT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

)

ASSIGNABLE

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

( Single

FRONT WIDE /

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT MULTI CH IN

SURROUND

OUTPUT

AC IN

)

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

OUTPUT

SURROUND BACK

(

)

Single

Connecting additional amplifiers

This receiver has more than enough power for any home use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers.

ANALOG

INPUT

Front channel

amplifier

ANALOG

INPUT

Center channel amplifier (mono)

ANALOG

INPUT

Surround

channel amplifier

OUT 1

)

VIDEO

SIGNAL

ITOR

GND

CD IN

AUDIO

TER

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

OUT 2

(CONTROL)

COAXIAL

FRONT

RLRLRLRL

(

OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTER

FRONT HEIGHT

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

)

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

(

)

Single

PRE OUT MULT I CH IN

FRONT WIDE /

)

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

AC IN

SURROUND BACK

(

)

Single

ANALOG

INPUT

ANALOG

INPUT

ANALOG

INPUT

ANALOG

INPUT

ANALOG

INPUT

Front height channel amplifier

Front wide channel amplifier

Surround back channel amplifier

Powered subwoofer 2

Powered subwoofer 1

! The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Speaker

system setting on page 87.

! The audio signal input to MULTI CH IN cannot be downmixed.

! If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 85) to

LARGE.

! You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as

well. In this case plug the amplifier into the left (SURROUND BACK L (Single)) terminal only.

! The sound from the surround back terminals will depend on how you have configured the Speaker

system setting on page 87.

! If you have two subwoofers, the second subwoofer can be connected to the SUBWOOFER 2

terminal. Connecting two subwoofers increases the bass sound to achieve more powerful sound reproduction. In this case, the same sound is output from the two subwoofers.

! To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any

speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.

Connecting your equipment

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VDVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

CU-RF100

SPEAKERS

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

Connecting AM/FM antennas

Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire antenna as shown below. To improve reception and sound quality, connect external antennas (see Connecting external antennas on page 29).

AM LOOP

FM UNBAL 75

ANTENNA

ab c

1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna wires.

2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire fully into each terminal, then release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.

3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached stand.

To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then clip the loop onto the stand (fig. b).

! If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a

wall or other surface, secure the stand with screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.

4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and in a direction giving the best reception.

5 Connect the FM wire antenna into the FM antenna socket.

For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.

MULTI-ZONE setup

This receiver can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI-ZONE connections. Different sources can be playing in three zones

Connecting external antennas

To improve FM reception, connect an external FM antenna to FM UNBAL 75 W.

at the same time or, depending on your needs, the same source can also be used. The main and sub zones have independent power (the main zone power can be off while one (or both) of the sub zones is on) and the sub zones can

75 Ω coaxial cable

be controlled by the remote or front panel controls.

Making MULTI-ZONE connections

It is possible to make these connections if

AM LOOP

FM UNBAL 75

ANTENNA

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna. For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally outdoors.

Outdoor antenna

Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated wire)

you have a separate TV and speakers for your primary (ZONE 2) sub zone, and a separate TV and a separate amplifier (and speakers) for your secondary (ZONE 3) sub zone. You will also need a separate amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) on page 29 for your primary sub zone. There are two primary sub zone setups possible with this system. Choose whichever works best for you.

MULTI-ZONE listening options

The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2 and ZONE 3:

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

FM UNBAL 75

5 m to 6 m

Sub

Input functions available

Zone

It is not possible to down-convert the audio and video input signals from the HDMI input terminals, digital input terminals (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) and the COMPONENT VIDEO input terminals and output them to ZONE 2/ZONE 3.

Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)

1 Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT jacks on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.

2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver.

SC-LX85 only:

! COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be

used to output clear images.

! The GUI screen is not displayed if only the

COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected.

Sub zone (ZONE 2) Main zone

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO,

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod/USB, CD, TUNER, ADAPTER PORT

(Outputs analog audio, composite video and component video (SC-LX85 only).)

DVD, TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, iPod/USB, CD, TUNER, ADAPTER PORT

(Outputs analog audio, composite video.)

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2)

Either the surround back or the front wide speaker terminals can be used as the speaker terminals for ZONE 2. For details, see Determining the speakers’ application on page

15.

03 Connecting your equipment

PRE OUT

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE FRONT

(CD))

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN

(

VIDEO

)

(

10/100

)

LAN

( OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

L RL

( Single

)

FRONT WIDE /

RS-232C

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TDVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2 OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

CU-RF100

SPEAKER

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

HDMI

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

PRE OUT

SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE FRONT

(CD)

)

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN

(

VIDEO

)

(

ADA

(

10/100

)

LAN

( OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

L RL

( Single

)

FRONT WIDE /

RS-232C

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2 OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

CU-RF100

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TR

(OUTPUT TOTAL 15

HDMI

(VID

IN1IN

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

H IN

SURROUND BACK

( Single

)

AC IN

RS-232C

ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2 OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

CU-RF100

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TR

(OUTPUT TOTAL 15

HDMI

(VID

IN1IN

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

RS-232C

ZONE 2

IN IN

OUT

ZONE 3

OUT

TV/SAT VDVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

YPBP

ASSIGNABLE

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

(

DVD

)

(

DVR/ BDR

)

(

VIDEO

)

CU-RF100

SPEAKERS

FM UNBAL 75

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

(

OUTPUT 5 V 150 mA MAX

)

CONTROL

OUT

12 V TRIGGER

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

HDMI

BD IN

(VIDEO)

IN1IN

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back or front wide speaker terminals.

2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack on this receiver.

SC-LX85 only:

To use the front wide speaker terminals for ZONE 2:

To use the surround back speaker terminals for ZONE 2:

! COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT can be

used to output clear images.

! The GUI screen is not displayed if only the

COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack is connected.

Sub zone (ZONE 2)

VIDEO IN

Sub zone (ZONE 2)

VIDEO IN

Main zone

Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 3)

1 Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE 3 OUT jacks on this receiver.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.

2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT jack on this receiver.

Sub zone (ZONE 3) Main zone

VIDEO IN

AUDIO IN

Secondary MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 3)

You must select 5.1ch + ZONE 2+3 in Speaker system setting on page 87 to use this setup.

1 Connect a pair of speakers to the front wide speaker terminals.

You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration.

2 Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE 3 OUT jack on this receiver.

Sub zone (ZONE 3)

VIDEO IN

Main zone

Connecting to the network through LAN interface

By connecting this receiver to the network via the LAN terminal, you can listen to Internet radio stations. To listen to Internet radio stations, you must sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand. When connected in this way, you can play audio files stored on the components on the network, including your computer, using HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs.

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

IN1IN

)

DVD

FER2SURROUNDSURR BACK F HEIGHTF WIDEFRO

LR L

Connect the LAN terminal on this receiver to the LAN terminal on your router (with or without the built-in DHCP server function) with a straight LAN cable (CAT 5 or higher). Turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. For details, see Network Setup menu on page 89.

(CD)(

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

0.6 A MAX

OPTICAL

IN1IN2IN

)

( Single

FRONT WIDE /

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

ASSIGNABLE

)

(

VIDEO

PRE OUT

LAN

(

10/100

)

Internet

Modem

LAN

321

to LAN port

WAN

Router

LAN cable (sold separately)

Connecting your equipment

PRE OUTMULTI CH IN

R2SURROUND SURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE

CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR BACK

(CD)VD)

N1IN

(

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

)

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

VIDEO

)

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.1 A MAX

)

ADAPTER PORT

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

10/100

)

LAN

(

OUTPUT

5 V

0.6 A MAX

)

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

LR LR LR L

(

Single

)

( Single

)

FRONT WIDE /

AC IN

SUBWOOFER

Bluetooth® ADAPTER

LAN terminal specifications

! LAN terminal : Ethernet jack

(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Note

! Refer to the operation manual of the

equipment you have as the connected equipment and connection method may differ depending on your Internet environment.

! When using a broadband Internet connection,

a contract with an Internet service provider is required. For more details, contact your nearest Internet service provider.

Connecting optional Bluetooth ADAPTER

When the Bluetooth® ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this receiver, a product equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly. ! The Bluetooth wireless technology enabled

device must support A2DP profiles.

! Pioneer does not guarantee proper connection

and operation of this unit with all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Important

! Do not move the receiver with the Bluetooth

ADAPTER connected. Doing so could cause damage or faulty contact.

% Switch the receiver into standby and connect Bluetooth ADAPTER to the ADAPTER PORT.

! For instructions on playing the Bluetooth

wireless technology device, see Pairing the

Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device on page 43.

Connecting an iPod

This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.

iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

AUTO SURR/ALC/

STREAM DIRECT HOME THX

ADVANCED SURROUND

STANDARD SURROUND

% Switch the receiver into standby then use the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod to the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

! It is also possible to connect using the cable

included with the iPod, but in this case it is not possible to view pictures via the receiver.

! For the cable connection, also refer to the

operating instructions for your iPod.

! For instructions on playing the iPod, see

Playing an iPod on page 38.

Connecting a USB device

It is possible to play audio and photo files by connecting USB devices to this receiver. It is also possible to connect a USB keyboard (US-international layout) to the receiver to enter text in the following GUI screens. ! Change the input name in the Input Setup

menu (page 36).

% Switch the receiver into standby then connect your USB device to the USB terminal on the front panel of this receiver.

! This receiver does not support a USB hub. ! For instructions on playing the USB device,

see Playing a USB device on page 39.

Connecting an HDMI-equipped component to the front panel input

AUTO SURR/ALC/

iPod iPhone iPad

STREAM DIRECT HOME THX

DIRECT CONTROL

USB

5V 2.1 A

iPod iPhone iPad

ADVANCED SURROUND

STANDARD SURROUND

HDMI 3 INPUT

! Add names to radio station presets (page 42).

iPod cable (supplied)

5V 2.1 A

iPod iPhone iPad

AUTO SURR/ALC/

USB

HDMI 3 INPUT

iPod





iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

STREAM DIRECT

5V 2.1 A

iPod iPhone iPad

USB

ADVANCED SURROUND

STANDARD

SURROUND

HDMI 3 INPUT

Video camera (etc.)

Connecting to a wireless LAN

Wireless connection to the network is possible through a wireless LAN connection. Use the AS-WL300 for connection. ! Use only the furnished accessory connecting

cable.

! For instructions on setting the wireless LAN

converter, see Network Setup menu on page

USB mass storage device

USB keyboard

89.

03 Connecting your equipment

DC OUTPUT

for WIRELESS LAN

(

OUTPUT 5 V

0.6 A MAX

BLE

OPTICAL

IN1IN

(CD)(

)

DVD

OFER2SURROUNDSURR BACK F HEIGHT F WIDE CENTERFRONTSURROUNDSURR

LR LR

ADAPTER PORT

(

OUTPUT 5 V

LAN

0.1 A MAX

(

)

10/100

)

ASSIGNABLE

IN1IN2IN3OUT

(

)

(

)

DVR/BDR)(TV/SAT

VIDEO

(

)

Single

PRE OUT MULTI

FRONT WIDE /

SUBWOOFER

)

Internet

Modem

SURROUND

Router

WAN

DC 5V WPS

Ethernet

Wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)

Connecting an IR receiver

If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone, you can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver. ! Remote operation may not be possible if direct

light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.

! Note that other manufacturers may not use

the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.

! If using two remote controls (at the same

time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.

1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this receiver.

Closet or shelving unit

Pioneer component

CONTROL

IN OUT

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

COMPONENT VIDEO

ASSIGNABLE

YPBP

(

)

DVD

(

DVR/

)

BDR

(

)

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2 OUT

RS-232C

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V

)

150 mA MAX

IN1IN

FM UNBAL 75

OUT

CONTROL

ZONE 2

(VIDEO)

ZONE 3

IN IN IN

OUT

SPEAKERS

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

Non-Pioneer component

(DVD)

BD IN

TV/SAT VIDEODVD

DVR/

OUTOUT

FRONT

IR receiver

2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.

Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection.

! If you want to link a Pioneer component to

the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor on page 32 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.

Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s sensor

Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks which can be used to link components together so that you can use just the remote sensor of one component. When you use a remote control, the control signal is passed along the chain to the appropriate component. ! If you want to control all your components

using this receiver’s remote control, see page

74.

! If you have connected a remote control to the

CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.

Important

! Note that if you use this feature, make sure

that you also have at least one set of analog audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to

another component for grounding purposes.

1 Decide which component you want to use the remote sensor of.

When you want to control any component in the chain, this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the corresponding remote control.

2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection.

IN1IN

(VIDEO)

ZONE 3

OUT

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

IN OUT

CONTROL

IN IN

SPEAKERS

BD I

TV/SATDVD

IN OUT

CONTROL

ASSIGNABLE

(

MONITOR

ZONE2

RS-232C

(

DVD

(

DVR/ BDR

VIDEO

OUT

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE

1 6

YPBP

)

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX

COMPONENT VIDEO

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

FM UNBAL 75

CONTROL

ZONE 2

OUT

3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many components as you have.

Connecting your equipment

MONITOR

Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger

You can connect components in your system (such as a screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function. However, you must specify which input functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup menu on page 36. Note that this will only work with components that have a standby mode.

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

AM LOOP

FM UNBAL 75

ANTENNA

OUT

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V

12 V TRIGGER

INPUT

150 mA MAX

% Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to the 12 V trigger of another component.

Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the connection. After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on page 36.

Note

! It is also possible to have the component

switch not when the input function is switched, but when HDMI OUT is switched. For details, see HDMI Setup on page 54.

OUT

)

CONTROL

SPEAKERS

(OUTPUT 12 V TOTAL 150 mA MAX)

12 V TRIGGER

Plugging in the receiver

Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this receiver, including the speakers.

CAUTION

! Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do

not pull out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet, as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement.

! Do not use any power cord other than the one

supplied with this unit.

! Do not use the supplied power cord for any

purpose other than that described below.

! The receiver should be disconnected by

removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use, e.g., when on vacation.

! Make sure the blue u STANDBY/ON light has

gone out before unplugging.

1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the receiver.

2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.

! After this receiver is connected to an AC

outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking.

When you set the Control with HDMI to OFF, you can skip this process. For details about the Control with HDMI feature, see Control with HDMI function on page 54.

04 Basic Setup

Basic Setup

About remote control operation

Important

! The procedure for setting the receiver

operation mode differs for the remote controls included with the SC-LX85 and SC-LX75. For the SC-LX85’s remote control, set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER. For the SC-LX75’s remote control, press the

button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language)

The language used on the Graphical User Interface screen can be changed. ! The explanations in these operating

instructions are for when English is selected for the GUI screen.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

4 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System Setup menu.

5 Select the desired language.

6 Select ‘OK’ to change the language.

The setting is completed and the System Setup menu reappears automatically.

Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC)

The Full Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, speaker connection and speaker size, and tests for both channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided with your system, the receiver uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room. By performing the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure, the frequency-phase characteristics of the connected speakers are also calibrated. Once the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed, the Full Band Phase Control function is automatically turned on (page 48).

Important

! Make sure the microphone and speakers are

not moved during the Full Auto MCACC Setup.

! Using the Full Auto MCACC Setup will

overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.

! Before using the Full Auto MCACC Setup, the

headphones should be disconnected.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Full Auto MCACC

Setup are output at high volume.

THX

! THX is a trademark of THX Ltd. which is

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.

AUTO SURR/ALC/

MCACC

SETUP MIC

iPod iPhone iPad

DIRECT CONTROL

STREAM DIRECT

5V 2.1 A

iPod iPhone iPad

USB

Microphone

Tripod

MULTI-ZONE

CONTROL ON/OFF

PHONES

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone. If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone. Install the microphone on a stable floor. Placing the microphone on any of the following

surfaces may make accurate measurement impossible:

! Sofas or other soft surfaces. ! High places such as tabletops and sofa tops.

The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

Speaker System : 9.1ch FH/FW EQ Type : SYMMETRY MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1 THX Speaker : NO

START

A/V RECEIVER

Exit Return

! If you leave the GUI screen for over five

minutes, the screen saver will appear.

3 Select the parameters you want to set.

! When data measurement is taken, the

reverb characteristics data (both before- and after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

! When measurement is taken of the reverb

characteristics data other than SYMMETRY, the data are not measured after the correction. If you will need to measure after correcting data, take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup (page 82).

If the speakers are connected using any setup other than 9.1ch FH/FW, be sure to set Speaker System before the Full Auto MCACC Setup. See Speaker system setting on page 87.

! Speaker System – Shows the current

settings. When this is selected and ENTER is pressed, the speaker system selection screen appears. Select the proper speaker system, then press RETURN to return.

If you are planning on bi-amping your front

speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Speaker system setting on page 87 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.

Basic Setup

! EQ Type – This determines how the

frequency balance is adjusted.

! MCACC – The six MCACC presets are used

for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 86).

! THX Speaker – Select YES when using THX

speakers (all speakers other than the front speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases, leave at NO.

4 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then select START.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to a comfortable volume level.

6 Wait for the test tones to finish, then confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this. If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Full Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 7.

! With error messages (such as Too much

ambient noise! or Check microphone.),

select RETRY after checking for ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 35) and verifying the mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT and continue.

1a.Full Auto MCACC

Now Analyzing... 2/10

Environment Check

Exit Cancel

A/V RECEIVER

Ambient Noise : OK Microphone : Speaker YES/NO :

L : YES FHL : YES C : YES FHR : YES R : YES SR : YES SBR : YES SBL : YES SL : YES SW : YES

OK RETRY

Exi

1a.Full Auto MCACC

A/V RECEIVER

eturn

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have.

! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker

configuration displayed isn’t correct), there may be a problem with the speaker connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the power and check the speaker connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use i/j to select the speaker and k/l to change the setting and continue.

! If the speaker is not pointed to the

microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s

wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections. — If the connections were wrong, turn off

the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly. After this, perform the Full Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select

GO NEXT and continue.

7 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings. Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.

8 The Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Home Menu menu reappears automatically.

Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Full Auto MCACC Setup. The settings made in the Full Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using The

Advanced MCACC menu on page 80 or The System Setup and Other Setup menus on page

87.

! Depending on the characteristics of your

room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 87.

! The subwoofer distance setting may be

farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

! If Full Auto MCACC Setup measurement

results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup

If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary. If there are any instructions showing in the front panel display, please follow them. ! Some older TVs may interfere with the

operation of the microphone. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.

04 Basic Setup

The Input Setup menu

You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings (see Input function default and possible settings on page 36). In this case, you need to tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you’ve connected.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4.System Setup

Exi

A/V RECEIVER

4b.Input Setup

Input : DVD

Input Name : Rename Input Skip : OFF

Digital In : COAX-1 HDMI Input : I nput-5 Component In : In-1

12V Trigger1 : OFF 12V Trigger2 : OFF

Exi

A/V RECEIVER

eturn

a.Manual SP Setup

b. Input Setup

c. OSD Language d. Network Setup e. HDMI Setup f. Other Setup

4 Select the input function that you want to set up.

The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD or BD) which, in turn, correspond with the names on the remote control.

5 Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your component.

For example, if your DVD player only has an optical output, you will need to change the DVD input function’s Digital In setting from COAX-1 (default) to the optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1 to OPT-2) corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the receiver.

6 When you’re finished, proceed to the settings for other inputs.

There are optional settings in addition to the assignment of the input jacks:

! Input Name – You can choose to rename the

input function for easier identification. Select Rename to do so, or Default to return to the system default.

! Input Skip – When set to ON, that input

is skipped when selecting the input using INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can be still be selected directly with the input function buttons.)

! 12V Trigger1/2 – After connecting a

component to one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 33), select MAIN, ZONE 2, ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding trigger setting to switch it on automatically along with the (main or sub) zone specified. — Devices connected to 12 volt triggers can

be associated with HDMI OUT switching. For details, see HDMI Setup on page 54.

7 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the System Setup menu.

Input function default and possible settings

The terminals on the receiver generally correspond to the name of one of the input functions. If you have connected components to this receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup menu on page 36 to tell the receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots (k) indicate possible assignments.

Input

function

DVD IN 5 COAX-1 IN 1

TV/SAT

DVR/BDR IN 6 OPT-2 IN 2

VIDEO IN 4 OPT-3 IN 3

HDMI 1 IN 1

HDMI 2 IN 2

HDMI 3

(front panel)

HOME

MEDIA GAL-

LERY

iPod/USB

CD COAX-2

TUNER

ADAPTER

PORT

PHONO

MULTI CH IN

a With Control with HDMI set to ON, assignments

cannot be made (see Control with HDMI function on page 54).

b SC-LX85 only

Input Terminals

HDMI Digital Component

(BD)

<a>

IN 3

OPT-1

Operation Mode Setup

This receiver is equipped with a great number of functions and settings. The Operation Mode feature is provided for users who find it difficult to master all these functions and settings. One of two settings can be selected for the

Operation Mode: Expert and Basic.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Operation Mode Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the Operation Mode setting you want.

! Expert (default) – Users can set all the

functions by themselves.

! Basic – The number of operable functions is

restricted, and functions whose operations are restricted are automatically set to achieve the Pioneer-recommended sound and picture quality. The functions that can be operated are shown below. They can be set as necessary by referring to the operating instructions.

Operable functions/ items

HOME MENU

Full Auto MCACC

Input Name

Input Skip

Descriptions Page

Makes high precision sound field settings easily.

Input names can be changed as desired for easier use.

Inputs not being used are skipped (not displayed).

Basic Setup

Operable functions/ items

Software Update

Network Information

Pairing Bluetooth Setup

Audio Parameters

MCACC (MCACC preset)

DELAY (Sound Delay)

S.RTRV (Auto Sound Retriever)

DUAL (Dual Mono)

V.SB (Virtual Surround Back)

V.HEIGHT (Virtual Height)

V.DEPTH (Virtual Depth)

Other functions

INPUT SELECT (INPUT SELECTOR)

MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE

LISTENING MODE

PQLS

Descriptions Page

Updates to the latest version of the software.

Checks the receiver’s IP address.

Pairs with a Bluetooth device using AS-BT100 or AS-BT200.

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory.

Adjusts the delay time of the overall sound.

Plays compressed sound with high sound quality.

Dual monaural audio setting.

Creates a virtual surround back channel sound for playback.

Creates a virtual height channel sound for playback.

Plays with a sound field suited for 3D images.

Switches the input. 38

Use to set the listening volume.

Only Pioneer-recommended modes can be selected.

Plays using the PQLS function.

Operable functions/

Descriptions Page

items

PHASE CTRL (Phase Control)

PHASE CTRL (Full Band Phase Control)

iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL

Plays with phase shifting in the low range corrected.

The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected.

Switches the input to iPod/ USB and sets the mode allowing operation from the iPod.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Home Menu.

05 Basic playback

Basic playback

About remote control operation

Important

! The procedure for setting the receiver

button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Playing a source

Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.

1 Switch on your system components and receiver.

Start by switching on the playback component (for example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver (press u RECEIVER). Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

3 Select the input function you want to play.

You can use the input function buttons on the remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.

! If you need to manually switch the input

signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 47).

4 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.

If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound source, you should hear surround sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.

! You may need to check the digital audio

output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.

! See also Listening to your system on page 45

for information on different ways of listening

to sources. It is possible to check on the front panel display whether or not multi-channel playback is being performed properly. For details, see Auto

Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 110.

When using a surround back speaker, 2DIGITAL is displayed when playing Dolby Digital 5.1 channel signals, and DTS is displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals. If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode, check the connections and settings.

5 Use the MASTER VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level.

Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.

Playing a source with HDMI connection

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function connected to the receiver’s HDMI input terminals.

You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly.

! Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio

options on page 57 to THROUGH if you want

to hear HDMI audio output from your TV (no sound will be heard from this receiver).

! If the video signal does not appear on your

Selecting the multichannel analog inputs

SC-LX85 only

If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs for surround sound playback. ! When the center or surround speakers are

bi-amped, no sound is produced even when

MULTI CH IN is selected. (Check Determining the speakers’ application on page 15 and Biamping your speakers on page 18.)

! When playback from the multichannel inputs

is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.

! With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play

pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 92.

1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the proper output setting.

For example, you might need to set your DVD player to output multichannel analog audio.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then use INPUT SELECT c/d to select MULTI CH IN.

You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel.

! Depending on the DVD player you’re using,

the analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be too low. In this case, the output level of the subwoofer can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in Other Setup. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 92.

Playing an iPod

This receiver has the iPod iPhone iPad USB terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this receiver. ! This receiver is compatible with the audio and

video of the iPod nano (audio only for the iPod nano 1G/2G/6G), iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic, iPod touch, iPhone, iPhone 3G, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4 and iPad. However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The receiver is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.

! This receiver has been developed and tested

for the software version of iPod/iPhone/iPad indicated on the website of Pioneer (http:// pioneer.jp/homeav/support/ios/eu/).

! Installing software versions other than

indicated on the website of Pioneer to your iPod/iPhone/iPad may result in incompatibility with this receiver.

! iPod, iPhone and iPad are licensed for

reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted to reproduce.

Basic playback

! Features such as the equalizer cannot

be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.

! Pioneer cannot under any circumstances

accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.

! When listening to a track on the iPod in the

main zone, it is possible to control the sub zone, but not to listen to a different track in the sub zone from the one playing in the main zone.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting an iPod on page 31.

! It is also possible to operate the iPod on the

iPod itself, without using the TV screen. For details, see Switching the iPod controls on page 39.

2 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

3 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen while the

receiver verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod. When the display shows the iPod Top menu you’re ready to play music from the iPod.

! The controls of your iPod will be inoperable

when connected to this receiver.

Playing back audio files stored on an iPod

To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected to this receiver. You can also control all operations for music in the front panel display of this receiver. ! Note that characters that cannot be displayed

on this receiver are displayed as #.

! This feature is not available for photos on your

iPod. To display photos, switch iPod operation to the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on page 39).

Finding what you want to play

When your iPod is connected to this receiver, you can browse songs stored on your iPod by playlist, artist name, album name, song name, genre or composer, similar to using your iPod directly.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the iPod Top menu.

2 Use i/j to select a category, then press ENTER to browse that category.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

3 Use i/j to browse the selected category (e.g., albums).

! Use k/l to move to previous/next levels.

4 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

Note

! You can play all of the songs in a particular

category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list. For example, you can play all the songs by a particular artist.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on an iPod. ! During Audiobook playback, press i/j to

switch the playback speed: Faster f Normal f Slower.

SC-LX85:

! Set the remote control operation selector

switch to SOURCE, then press iPod USB to

switch the remote control to the iPod/USB operation mode.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUTMUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL PTY SEARCH

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

MUTE

PARAMETER

RETURN

VOL

VIDEO

T.EDIT GUIDE

STATUS

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

THX PQLSMPX MEMORY

AUTO/ALC/

STANDARD ADV SURR

DIRECT

STEREO

PGMMENU

SIGNAL SELSLEEP AUDIO

DIMMER

A.ATT

SBch MCACC

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLASS

ENTER

CLR

INFO

DISP

SC-LX75:

! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control

to the iPod/USB operation mode.

PGM

AUTO/ALC

STEREO

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

VIDEO

PARAMETER

RETURN

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

T.EDIT

PRESET

DIRECT STANDARD

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

HDMI OUT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

ADV SURR

PHASE

CTRL STATUSTHX

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

546

Switching the iPod controls

You can switch over the iPod controls between the iPod and the receiver. ! You cannot use this function, when an

iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.

1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod controls.

This enables operation and display on your iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and GUI screen become inactive.

2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the receiver controls.

Note

! Change the receiver’s input to the

iPod in one action by pressing the iPod iPhone iPad DIRECT CONTROL button on the front panel to enable iPod operations on the iPod.

Playing a USB device

It is possible to play files using the USB interface on the front of this receiver. ! Compatible USB devices include external

magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory drives (particularly key drives) and digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32.

! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility

(operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

See Connecting a USB device on page 31.

! Make sure the receiver is in standby when

disconnecting the USB device.

2 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

3 Press iPod USB on the remote control to switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.

Loading appears in the GUI screen as this

receiver starts recognizing the USB device connected. When the display shows the USB Top menu you’re ready to play from the USB device.

Note

If an Over Current message lights in the display, the power requirements of the USB device are too high for this receiver. Try following the points below: ! Switch the receiver off, then on again.

05 Basic playback

! Reconnect the USB device with the receiver

switched off.

! Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with the

device) for USB power. If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely your USB device is incompatible.

Playing back audio files stored on a USB memory device

The maximum number of levels that you can select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can display and play back up to 30 000 folders and files within a USB memory device. ! Note that non-Roman characters in the playlist

are displayed as #.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Music’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

! Copyrighted audio files cannot be played

back on this receiver.

! DRM-protected audio files cannot be played

back on this receiver.

Basic playback controls

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on USB memory devices.

SC-LX85:

! Set the remote control operation selector

switch to SOURCE, then press iPod USB to

switch the remote control to the iPod/USB

operation mode.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUTMUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL PTY SEARCH

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

MUTE

PARAMETER

VOL

VIDEO

T.EDIT GUIDE

RETURN

STATUS

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

THX PQLSMPX MEMORY

AUTO/ALC/

STANDARD ADV SURR

DIRECT

STEREO

PGMMENU

SIGNAL SELSLEEP AUDIO

DIMMER

A.ATT

SBch MCACC

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLASS

ENTER

CLR

INFO

DISP

SC-LX75:

! Press iPod USB to switch the remote control

to the iPod/USB operation mode.

PGM

AUTO/ALC

STEREO

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

RETURN

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

PRESET

DIRECT STANDARD

HDD DVD

DTV MPX PQLS

HDMI OUT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

ADV SURR

PHASE

CTRL STATUSTHX

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

546

Playing back photo files stored on a USB memory device

! Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Photos’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Use i/j to select a folder, then press ENTER to browse that folder.

! To return to the previous level any time, press

RETURN.

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play, then press d to start playback.

The selected content is displayed in full screen and a slideshow starts. After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER toggles between play and pause (only when

Theme on the Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF)).

! If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for

five minutes, the list screen reappears.

Basic playback controls

Button(s) What it does

ENTER, d

RETURN, k

<a>

DISP

<a>

a You can only use this button when Theme on the

Slideshow Setup is set to Normal (OFF).

Starts displaying a photo and playing a slideshow.

Stops the player and returns to the previous menu.

Displays the previous photo content.

Displays the next photo content.

Pauses/unpauses the slideshow.

Displays the photo information.

Slideshow Setup

Make the various settings for playing slideshows of photo files here.

1 Use i/j to select ‘Slideshow Setup’ from the USB Top menu.

2 Select the setting you want.

! Theme – Add various effects to the

slideshow.

! Interval – Set the interval for switching the

photos. This may not be available depending on the Theme setting.

! BGM – Play music files stored on the USB

device while displaying photos.

! Music Select – Select the folder containing

the music files to be played when BGM is set to ON.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the USB Top menu.

Basic playback

About playable file formats

The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

MP3

<a>

WAV .wav LPCM

WMA .wma

a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not sup-

ported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.

.mp3

MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio

Layer-3

WMA8/9

Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit

Channel 2 ch, Monaural

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Photo files

Category Extension

Meeting the following conditions: ! Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF

format)

! Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0

JPEG

.jpg

.jpeg

.jpe

.jif

.jfif

Format

Resolution 30 to 8184 pixels vertical, 40 to 8184 pixels horizontal

Listening to the radio

The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can memorize the frequency for recall later-see Saving station presets on page 41 for more on how to do this.

1 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

3 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.

4 Tune to a station.

There are three ways to do this:

! Automatic tuning – To search for stations

in the currently selected band, press and hold TUNE i/j for about a second. The receiver will start searching for the next station, stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for other stations.

! Manual tuning – To change the frequency

one step at a time, press TUNE i/j.

! High speed tuning – Press and hold TUNE

i/j for high speed tuning. Release the

button at the frequency you want.

Improving FM sound

If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light when tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press MPX to switch the receiver into mono reception mode. This should improve the sound quality and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.

Using the noise cut mode

The two noise cut modes can be used when receiving AM broadcasts. Press MPX to select the noise cut mode (1 to 2).

Using Neural Surround

This feature uses Neural SurroundTM technologies to achieve optimal surround sound from FM radio. ! While listening to FM radio, press

AUTO/ALC/DIRECT for Neural Surround.

! The Neural Surround mode can be selected

also with STANDARD.

Tuning directly to a station

1 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

3 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM), if necessary.

4 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).

5 Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of the radio station.

For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.

If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and start over.

Saving station presets

If you often listen to a particular radio station, it’s convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station. This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This receiver can memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.

05 Basic playback

1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.

See Listening to the radio on page 41 for more on this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a blinking memory class.

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven classes, then press PRESET k/l to select the station preset you want.

You can also use the number buttons to select a station preset.

4 Press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop blinking and the receiver stores the station.

Listening to station presets

1 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press TUNER to select the tuner.

3 Press CLASS to select the class in which the station is stored.

Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.

4 Press PRESET k/l to select the station preset you want.

! You can also use the number buttons on the

remote control to recall the station preset.

Naming station presets

For easier identification, you can name your station presets.

1 Choose the station preset you want to name.

See Listening to station presets on page 42 for how to do this.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).

The display shows PRESET NAME, then a blinking cursor at the first character position.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Note

! To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1

to 3 and input eight spaces instead of a name.

! Once you have named a station preset, you

can press DISP when listening to a station to switch the display between name and frequency.

An introduction to RDS

Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of information-the name of the station and the kind of show they’re broadcasting, for example. One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program. For example, you can search for a station that’s broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ. You can search the following program types: ! In addition, there are two other program types,

TEST and NONE. You can’t search for these.

NEWS - News AFFAIRS - Current Affairs INFO - General Informa-

tion

SPORT - Sport EDUCATE - Educational DRAMA - Radio plays,

etc. CULTURE - National or regional culture, theater, etc. SCIENCE - Science and technology VARIED - Usually talkbased material, such as quiz shows or interviews.

POP M - Pop music ROCK M - Rock music EASY M - Easy listening LIGHT M - ‘Light’ classi-

cal music CLASSICS - ‘Serious’ classical music OTHER M - Music not fitting above categories WEATHER - Weather reports

FINANCE - Stock market reports, commerce, trading, etc. CHILDREN - Programs for children

SOCIAL - Social affairs RELIGION - Programs

concerning religion PHONE IN - Public expressing their views by phone TRAVEL - Holiday-type travel rather than traffic announcements LEISURE - Leisure interests and hobbies

JAZZ - Jazz COUNTRY - Country

music NATION M - Popular music in a language other than English OLDIES - Popular music from the ’50s and ’60s

FOLK M - Folk music DOCUMENT - Docu-

mentary

Searching for RDS programs

One of the most useful features of RDS is the ability to search for a particular kind of radio program. You can search for any of the program types listed above.

1 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press TUNER to select the FM band.

! RDS is only possible in the FM band.

3 Press PTY SEARCH.

PTY SEARCH shows in the display.

4 Press PRESET k/l to select the program type you want to hear.

5 Press ENTER to search for the program type.

The system starts searching through all frequencies for a match. When it finds one, the search stops and the station plays for five seconds.

6 If you want to keep listening to the station, press ENTER within the five seconds.

If you don’t press ENTER, searching resumes. If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner couldn’t find that program type at the time of the search.

! RDS searches all frequencies. If the program

type could not be found among all the frequencies, NO PTY is displayed.

Displaying RDS information

Use the DISP button to display the different types of RDS information available. ! If any noise is picked up while displaying the

RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.

! If you see NO RT DATA in the RT display, it

means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station.

! If you see NO PS DATA in the PS display, it

means no PS data can be received.

! If you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display, it

means no PTY data can be received.

% Press DISP for RDS information.

Each press changes the display as follows: ! Radio Text (RT) – Messages sent by the radio

station. For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone number as RT.

! Program Service Name (PS) – The name of the

radio station.

! Program Type (PTY) – This indicates the kind

of program currently being broadcast.

! Current tuner frequency.

Basic playback

Bluetooth ADAPTER for Wireless Enjoyment of Music

Device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology: Digital music

Bluetooth

wireless technology enabled device: cell phone

This receiver

INPUT

SELECTOR

STANDBY/ON

Bluetooth wireless technology enabled device: Digital music player

Music data

ADVANCED MCACC

FL OFF

Remote control operation

iPod iPhone iPadHDMI

Wireless music play

When the Bluetooth ADAPTER (AS-BT100 or AS-BT200) is connected to this unit, a product equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology (portable cell phone, digital music player, etc.) can be used to listen to music wirelessly. Also, by using a commercially available transmitter supporting Bluetooth wireless technology, you can listen to music on a device not equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. The AS-BT100 and AS-BT200 models supports SCMS-T contents protection, so music can also

player + Bluetooth audio transmitter (sold commercially)

Bluetooth

ADAPTER

MASTER VOLUME

be enjoyed on devices equipped with SCMS-T type Bluetooth wireless technology. ! With the AS-BT100, some functions may not

be available on this receiver.

Remote control operation

The remote control supplied with this unit allows you to play and stop media, and perform other operations. ! It must be necessary that the Bluetooth

wireless technology enabled device supports AVRCP profiles.

! Remote control operations cannot be

guaranteed for all Bluetooth wireless technology enabled devices.

Pairing the Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device

“Pairing” must be done before you start playback of Bluetooth wireless technology content using the Bluetooth ADAPTER. Make sure to perform pairing the first time you operate the system or any time pairing data is cleared. The pairing step is necessary to register the

Bluetooth wireless technology device to enable Bluetooth communications. For more details,

see also the operating instructions of your Bluetooth wireless technology device. ! Pairing is required when you first use the

Bluetooth wireless technology device and Bluetooth ADAPTER.

! To enable Bluetooth communication, pairing

should be done with both your system and Bluetooth wireless technology device.

! If the Bluetooth wireless technology device’s

security code is “0000”, there is no need to make the security code setting on the receiver. Press ADAPTER (SC-LX85) / ADPT (SC-LX75) to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful,

there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

! When using the AS-BT200 only: This unit

complies with Bluetooth Specifications Ver. 2.1. When this unit and another device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology both comply with Bluetooth Specification Ver.

2.1, pairing of the two may be possible without the need for inputting a password. In this case, a passcode may be displayed on this receiver and on the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology. If this happens, check that the same passcode is displayed on this receiver and the device equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, then select YES with the k and l keys and press ENTER. After this, also perform the connection operation on the Bluetooth device to be connected. If the passcode does not match the code displayed on the Bluetooth device to be connected, select NO to cancel pairing, then try starting over. Press ADAPTER (SC-LX85) / ADPT (SC-LX75) to set the ADAPTER PORT input, then conduct the pairing operation on the Bluetooth wireless technology device. If pairing is successful, there is no need to performing the pairing operation below.

! Pair one unit at a time. ! When connecting this receiver by Bluetooth

connections with a device equipped with the Bluetooth function to listen to music, do not connect any devices other than this receiver by Bluetooth connection to the Bluetoothequipped device. If a Bluetooth connection is already established with a device other than this receiver, disconnect the other device before connecting this receiver.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.

4 Select ‘Pairing Bluetooth Device’, then press ENTER.

5 Select the ‘Passcode’ setting you want.

Select the same passcode as the Bluetooth wireless technology device you wish to connect.

! 0000/1234/8888 – Select the passcode from

these options. These are the passcodes that can be used in most cases.

! Others – Select to use a passcode other than

those mentioned above.

6 If you selected ‘Others’ in step 5, enter the passcode.

Use i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.

7 Follow the instructions displayed on the GUI screen to conduct pairing with the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

Switch on the Bluetooth wireless technology device that you want to make pair, place it near the receiver and set it to the pairing mode.

8 Check to see that the Bluetooth ADAPTER is detected by the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is connected:

CONNECTED appears in the receiver display.

! The system can display alphanumeric

characters only. Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

When the Bluetooth wireless technology device is not connected:

Go back to the passcode setting in step 5. In this case, perform the connection operation from the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

9 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device list, select Bluetooth ADAPTER and enter the Passcode selected in step 5.

! The passcode may in some cases be referred

to as PASSKEY or PIN code.

05 Basic playback

Listening to music contents of a Bluetooth wireless technology device with your system

1 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press ADAPTER (SC-LX85) / ADPT (SCLX75) on the remote control to switch the receiver to ADAPTER PORT input.

! When the Bluetooth ADAPTER is not plugged

into the ADAPTER PORT, NO ADAPTER will be displayed if ADAPTER PORT input is selected.

3 From the Bluetooth wireless technology device, perform the operation to connect to the Bluetooth ADAPTER.

4 Start playback of music contents stored on the Bluetooth wireless technology device.

This receiver’s remote control buttons can be used for basic playback of files stored on Bluetooth wireless technology devices.

! Bluetooth wireless technology device should

be compatible with AVRCP profile.

! Depending on the Bluetooth wireless

technology device you use, operation may differ from what is shown in the remote control buttons.

SC-LX85:

SOURCE

VOLCH

RECEIVER

VOL

STATUS

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

THX PQLSMPX MEMORY

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

PGMMENU

STEREO

STANDARDADV SURR

5 While listening to a source, set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press ADV SURR repeatedly to select SOUND RETRIEVER AIR.

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PIONEER CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

SC-LX75:

HDD DVD

PHASE

CTRL STATUS

THX

TV / DTV MPX PQLS

HDMI OUT

13222

AUDIO

Listening to your system

About remote control operation

Important

! The procedure for setting the receiver

button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes

Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround sound. However, the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to. To play with surround sound, check “Standard surround sound”, “Using the Home THX modes” or “Using the Advanced surround effects” below and select the desired mode. To play with the optimum mode for the input signal, see “Auto playback” or “Using Stream Direct”. (The sound is played in stereo when 2-channel signals are input, in surround when multi-channel signals are input.)

Important

! The listening modes and many features

described in this section may not be available depending on the current source, settings and status of the receiver.

Auto playback

There are many ways to listen back to sources using this receiver, but the simplest, most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) for auto playback of a source.

AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the dis-

play before showing the decoding or playback format. Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.

! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby

Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

! When listening to the FM radio, the Neural

Surround feature is selected automatically (see Using Neural Surround on page 41 for more on this).

! When listening to the ADAPTER PORT

input, the SOUND RETRIEVER AIR feature is selected automatically.

ALC – In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this receiver equalizes playback sound levels. Also, the low and high frequency sounds, dialogs, surround effects, etc., that are difficult to hear when the volume is low are adjusted to be optimal for the volume level. This mode is particularly optimum when listening at night. OPTIMUM SURR – In the Optimum Surround mode, this receiver automatically optimizes sound balance in each scene based on actually

set volume. The sound balancer controls three major theater sound elements dialogue, bass and surround with original algorithm.

Note

! When ALC is selected, the effect level can

be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 57.

Standard surround sound

The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press STANDARD (STANDARD SURROUND).

If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.

! If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby

Surround encoded, the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display.

! If the surround back speakers are not

connected, 2 Pro Logic IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).

With two channel sources, you can select from:

! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to movie sources

! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to music sources

! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel

sound (surround back), especially suited to video games

! 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround

sound (sound from the surround speakers is mono)

! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – Up to 9.1 channel

sound (surround back and front height)

! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – Up to 7.1

channel sound (front wide), especially suited to movie sources

! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – Up to 7.1

channel sound (front wide), especially suited to music sources

! Neo:X CINEMA – Up to 9.1 channel sound

(surround back and front height or surround back and front wide), especially suited to movie sources

! Neo:X MUSIC – Up to 9.1 channel sound

(surround back and front height or surround back and front wide), especially suited to music sources

! Neo:X GAME – Up to 9.1 channel sound

(surround back and front height or surround back and front wide), especially suited to video games

! Neural Surround – Up to 7.1 channel sound

(surround back), especially suited to music sources

! STEREO – The audio is heard with your

sound settings and you can still use the audio options.

With multichannel sources, if you have connected surround back, front height or front wide speakers, you can select (according to format):

! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above ! Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back

channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)

! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT – See above ! WIDE SURROUND MOVIE – See above ! WIDE SURROUND MUSIC – See above ! Neo:X CINEMA – See above ! Neo:X MUSIC – See above ! Neo:X GAME – See above ! DTS-ES Matrix or DTS-ES Discrete – Allows

you to hear 6.1 channel playback with DTSES encoded sources

! STEREO – See above ! Straight Decode – Plays back without the

effects above.

06 Listening to your system

Note

! When listening sources in

2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 57).

! When listening to 2-channel sources in

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: C.WIDTH,DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 57 to adjust them.

! When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:X

Cinema, Neo:X Music or Neo:X Game mode, you can also adjust the C.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 57).

! Neural Surround can be selected for

2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital, DTS or analog 2-channel sources.

! The stereo mode can also be selected by

pressing the STEREO button.

! When listening through headphones, you can

select STEREO mode only.

Using the Home THX modes

THX and Home THX are technical standards created by THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX is designed to make home theater audio sound more like what you hear in a cinema. Different THX options will be available depending on the source and the setting for surround back channel processing (see THX Audio Setting on page 89 for more on this).

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press THX (HOME THX) to select a listening mode.

With two channel sources, press THX repeat- edly to select a matrix-decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode (see THX Audio Setting on page 89 for an explanation of each process):

! THX CINEMA ! THX MUSIC ! THX GAMES ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA ! 2 PRO LOGIC+THX CINEMA ! Neo:X CINEMA+THX CINEMA ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC ! Neo:X MUSIC+THX MUSIC ! 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME+THX GAMES ! Neo:X GAME+THX GAMES ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES

With multichannel sources, press THX (HOME THX) repeatedly to select from:

! THX CINEMA ! THX MUSIC ! THX GAMES ! THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1

or 7.1 channel playback with 5.1 channel sources

! Neo:X CINEMA+THX CINEMA ! Neo:X MUSIC+THX MUSIC ! Neo:X GAME+THX GAMES ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX CINEMA ! 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC+THX MUSIC ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX CINEMA ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX MUSIC ! 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT+THX GAMES

Note

! When listening sources in 2

Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode, you can also adjust the H.GAIN effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 57).

Using the Advanced surround effects

The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks to see which you like.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press ADV SURR (ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to select a listening mode.

! ACTION – Designed for action movies with

dynamic soundtracks

! DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of

dialog

! SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots

of special effects

! MONO FILM – Creates surround sound from

mono soundtracks

! ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources ! EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo

field

! TV SURROUND – Provides surround sound

for both mono and stereo TV sources

! ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video

games

! SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs ! CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type

sound

! ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound for

rock and/or pop music

! UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic music

sources

! EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to

a stereo source, using all of your speakers

! F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich

surround sound effect directed to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges.

! F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a surround

sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode.

FOCUS position (Recommended)

Front left speaker

Front right speaker

WIDE position

Front left speaker

Front right speaker

! SOUND RETRIEVER AIR – Suitable for

listening to the sound from a Bluetooth wireless technology device. The SOUND RETRIEVER AIR listening mode can only be selected when the ADAPTER PORT input.

! PHONES SURR – When listening through

headphones, you can still get the effect of overall surround.

Note

! When an Advanced Surround listening mode

is selected, the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 57.

However, with F.S.SURR FOCUS,

F.S.SURR WIDE and SOUND RETRIEVER AIR, the effect level cannot be adjusted.

! The Front Stage Surround Advance

(F.S.SURR FOCUS and F.S.SURR WIDE) function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer.

Using Stream Direct

Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog or digital sound source.

Listening to your system

Processing differs depending on the input signal and whether or not surround back speakers are connected. For details, see Auto Surround,

ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats on page 110.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select the mode you want.

Check the digital format indicators in the front panel display to see how the source is being processed.

! AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on

page 45.

! ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode

(page 45).

! DIRECT – Plays back sound from the

source with the least modification next to PURE DIRECT. With DIRECT, the only modifications added to PURE DIRECT playback are calibration of the sound field by the MCACC system and the Phase Control effect.

! PURE DIRECT – Plays back unmodified

sound from source with only minimal digital treatment.

! OPTIMUM SURR – Listening in Optimum

Surround mode (page 45).

Note

! When listening through headphones, you can

select ALC, OPTIMUM SURR or PURE DIRECT mode only.

Selecting MCACC presets

! Default setting: MEMORY 1 If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions, you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 While listening to a source, press MCACC.

Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets. See Data Management on page 86 to check and manage your current settings.

! These settings have no effect when

headphones are connected.

! You can also press k/l to select the

MCACC preset.

Choosing the input signal

On this receiver, it is possible to switch the input signals for the different inputs as described below. ! This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital,

PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz) and DTS (including DTS 96/24) digital signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTSEXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio and SACD.

! You may get digital noise when an LD, CD,

DVD or BD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connections (page 24) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.

! Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals.

For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component.

Each press cycles through the options as follows:

! AUTO – The receiver selects the first

available signal in the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.

! ANALOG – Selects an analog signal. ! DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial

digital signal.

! HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter

is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.

When set to DIGITAL, HDMI or AUTO (only selected DIGITAL or HDMI), the indicators light according to the signal being decoded (see Display on page 12).

Better sound using Phase Control

This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase correction measures to make sure your sound source arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound. Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image. The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase correction.

The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.

Note

! Phase matching is a very important factor

in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’, they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.

! For discs created with standards other than

Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. Phase Control Plus function corrects for phase shifting on such discs. For instructions on setting the Phase Control Plus, see Setting the Audio options on page 57.

! If your subwoofer has a phase control switch,

set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0º). However, the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.

! Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your

subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff frequency to a higher value.

! If the speaker distance is not properly set, you

may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.

! The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to

ON in the following cases:

— When headphones are plugged in. — When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched

on.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is

set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page 57.

06 Listening to your system

Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control

This receiver is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay: Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control. Activating Full Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it also involves the effects of Phase Control. The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers connected. Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers (in case of typical 3-way speakers, for instance, the tweeter, the squawker (midrange), and the woofer output sound in the high-, middle-, and low-frequency ranges, respectively). Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics across wide ranges, there are cases where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened. This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay (the delay of low-frequency sound against high-frequency sound) during audio signal playback. This receiver analyzes the frequency-phase characteristics of the speakers by measuring test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone, therefore flattening the analyzed frequency-phase characteristics during audio signal playback - the same correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers. This correction minimizes group delay between the ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency-phase characteristics across all ranges. Furthermore, the enhanced frequency-phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration for multichannel setting.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode.

2 Press PHASE CTRL (PHASE CONTROL) to select FULLBAND PHASE.

Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control functions are switched on. The FULL BAND and panel lights.

indicator, on the front

Note

! To calibrate and analyze the frequency-

phase characteristics of the speakers, either follow the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced MCACC (see Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page

34), or set Auto MCACC menu under

Auto MCACC under ADVANCED MCACC to Full Band Phase Ctrl. Select ALL when you

perform the Auto MCACC with Auto MCACC menu. Upon calibration of the frequencyphase characteristics of the speakers, the Full Band Phase Ctrl feature is automatically switched on.

! The original characteristics of group delay

of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the GUI screen (see Checking MCACC Data on page 85). Also, by transferring the measurement data to the computer using the CD-ROM (AVNavigator), the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3-dimension on your PC. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the Advanced MCACC PC Display Application Software included on the CD-ROM (AVNavigator).

! Depending on the input signal and listening

mode, it may not be possible to set the Full Band Phase Ctrl mode to ON.

! The Full Band Phase Ctrl mode cannot be set

to ON in the following cases:

— When headphones are plugged in. — When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched

on.

— When the HDMI audio output parameter is

set to THROUGH in Setting the Setting the Audio options on page 57.

Using the Full Band Phase Control’s FRONT ALIGN function

Full Band Phase Control calibrates frequency phase disturbances (group delay) for the full speaker band (Full Band) (SYMMETRY), but with this unit it is also possible to calibrate the frequency phase characteristics of other speakers to the frequency phase characteristics of the front speakers (FRONT ALIGN). Full Band Phase Control calibration can be performed in the FRONT ALIGN mode by making the settings and performing the operations below.

1 Perform Full Band Phase Control measurements with the Full Auto MCACC (or Auto MCACC) procedure.

2 Perform measurements with EQ Type set to FRONT ALIGN with the Full Auto MCACC (or Auto MCACC) procedure.

3 Press the MCACC button to select the MCACC memory at which the measurements performed with EQ Type set to FRONT ALIGN are stored.

4 Turn Full Band Phase Control on.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

About remote control operation

Important

! The procedure for setting the receiver

button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Enjoying the Home Media Gallery

This receiver’s Home Media Gallery function allows you to listen to audio files or listen to Internet radio stations on a computer or other component connected to the receiver’s LAN terminal. This chapter describes the setup and playback procedures required to enjoy these features. It is advisory that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component.

! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must

sign a contract with an ISP (Internet Service Provider) beforehand.

! Photo or video files cannot be played back. ! With Windows Media Player 11 or Windows

Media Player 12, you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this receiver.

Features of Home Media Gallery

This receiver is equipped with the LAN terminal and you can enjoy the following features by connecting your components to these terminals.

% Playback the music files stored in PCs

You can playback a lot of musics stored in your PCs using this unit. dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 50 and Playing back audio files stored on components on the network on page 50. ! Besides a PC, you can also play back audio

files stored on your other components with the built-in media server function based on DLNA

1.0 or DLNA 1.5 framework and protocols (i.e. network-capable hard disks and audio systems).

% Listening to Internet radio stations

You can select and listen to your favorite Internet radio station from the list of Internet radio stations created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with the Pioneer products. dSee Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 50 and Listening to Internet radio stations on page 50.

Introduction

About playable DLNA network devices

The Home Media Gallery allows you to play music on media servers connected on an identical Local Area Network (LAN) as the receiver. This unit allows for the playing of files stored on the following: ! PCs running Microsoft Windows Vista or XP

with Windows Media Player 11 installed

! PCs running Microsoft Windows 7 with

Windows Media Player 12 installed

! DLNA-compatible digital media servers (on

PCs or other components) Files stored in a PC or DMS (Digital Media Server) as described above can be played via command from an external Digital Media Controller (DMC). Devices controlled by this DMC to play files are called DMRs (Digital Media Renderers). This receiver supports this DMR function. When in the DMR mode, such operations as playing and stopping files can be performed from the external controller. Volume adjustment and the muting control are also possible. The DMR mode is canceled if the remote control unit is operated while in the DMR mode (aside from certain buttons, including the MASTER VOLUME +/–, MUTE and DISP). ! Depending on the external controller being

used, playback may be interrupted when the

volume is adjusted from the controller. In this

case, adjust the volume from the receiver or

remote control.

Using AirPlay on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad, and iTunes

This receiver supports AirPlay audio streaming from iPod touch (2nd, 3rd and 4th generations),

iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPad with iOS 4.2 or later, and iTunes 10.1 (Mac and PC) or later. To use AirPlay, select your receiver on your iPod touch, iPhone, iPad or in iTunes. *1 The receiver’s input will switch automatically to Home Media Gallery when AirPlay is in use. *2 The following operations can be performed when in AirPlay mode: ! Adjustment of the receiver’s volume from iPod

touch, iPhone, iPad or iTunes.

! Pause/resume, next/previous track, and

shuffle/repeat from the remote control of the receiver.

! Display of the currently playing track

information on the receiver’s display, including artist, song and album name.

*1: For more information, see the Apple website (http://www.apple.com). *2: The receiver’s power automatically turns on when Network Standby at Network Setup is set to ON.

Note

! A network environment is required to use

AirPlay.

! The receiver’s name that shows up in the

AirPlay UI on iPod touch, iPhone, iPad and iTunes can be changed by Friendly Name from Network Setup.

! AirPlay provided on this receiver has been

developed and tested based on the software versions for the iPod, iPhone, iPad and the software versions for iTunes that are indicated on the Pioneer website. AirPlay may not be compatible with iPod, iPhone, iPad or iTunes software versions other than those indicated on the Pioneer website.

About the DHCP server function

To play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations, you must turn on the DHCP server function of your router. In case your router does

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

not have the built-in DHCP server function, it is necessary to set up the network manually. Otherwise, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. See Network Setup menu on page 89 for more on this.

Authorizing this receiver

In order to be able to play with Home Media Gallery, this receiver must be authorized. This happens automatically when the receiver makes a connection over the network to the PC. If not, please authorize this receiver manually on the PC. The authorization (or permission) method for access varies depending on the type of server currently being connected. For more information on authorizing this receiver, refer to the instruction manual of your server.

Playback with Home Media Gallery

Important

! When you play back audio files,

‘Connecting...’ is displayed before playback starts. The display may continue for several seconds depending on the type of file.

! In case a domain is configured in a Windows

network environment, you cannot access a PC on the network while you are logged onto the domain. Instead of logging onto the domain, log onto the local machine.

! There are cases where the time elapsed may

not be correctly displayed.

1 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Press HMG to select Home Media Gallery as the input function.

It may take several seconds for this receiver to access the network. The following screen

appears when the Home Media Gallery is selected as the input function. The number next to

indicates the number of connected servers.

Top Menu

A/V RECEIVER

Internet Radio

******

Favorites Recently Played

1/4

! The server without the mark cannot be

accessed.

3 Use i/j to select the category you want to play back, and then press ENTER.

Select a category from the following list:

! Internet Radio – Internet radio ! Server Name – Server components on the

network

! Favorites – Favorite songs currently being

registered

! Recently played – Internet Radio listening

history (most recent 20 incidents) Depending on the selected category, the names of folders, files, and Internet radio stations are displayed.

4 Use i/j to select the folder, music files or Internet radio station to play back, and then press ENTER.

Press i/j to scroll up and down the list and select the desired item. When you press ENTER, playback starts with the playback screen being displayed for the selected item. To return to the list screen, press RETURN. When the list screen is displayed from the playback screen, the playback screen reappears automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds while the list screen is displayed. Only audio files with the mark can be played. In case of the folders with the mark, use i/j and ENTER to select the desired folder and audio files.

5 Repeat step 3 to play back the desired song.

For detailed operating instructions, refer to the section shown below.

! Internet radio stations – See Listening to

Internet radio stations on page 50.

! Server – See Playing back audio files stored on

components on the network on page 50.

Playing back audio files stored on components on the network

You can perform the following operations with the remote control of this receiver. Note that some buttons are not available for operation depending on the category currently being played back.

SC-LX85:

! Set the remote control operation selector

switch to SOURCE, then press HMG to switch the remote control to the HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

TV CONTROL

INPUTMUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL PTY SEARCH

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

PARAMETER

SC-LX75:

! Press HMG to switch the remote control to the

HOME MEDIA GALLERY operation mode.

TUNE

ENTER

TUNE

TOOLS

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

RETURN

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

VOL

MUTE

VIDEO

T.EDIT GUIDE

RETURN

PRESET

STATUS

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

THX PQLSMPX MEMORY

AUTO/ALC/

AUTO/ALC

SIGNAL SEL

STANDARD ADV SURR

DIRECT

STEREO

PGM MENU

SIGNAL SELSLEEP AUDIO

DIMMER

A.ATT

SBch MCACC

HDMI OUT

D.ACCESS

CLASS

ENTER

CLR

PGM

STEREO

DIRECT STANDARD

HDD DVD

PHASE

CTRL STATUSTHX

DTV MPX PQLS

HDMI OUT

MCACC SLEEP

546

INFO

DISP

MENU ADV SURR

AUDIO

INFO

DISP

Listening to Internet radio stations

Internet radio is an audio broadcasting service transmitted via the Internet. There are a large number of Internet radio stations broadcasting a variety of services from every corner of the world. Some are hosted, managed, and broadcast by private individuals while others are by the corresponding traditional terrestrial radio stations or radio networks. Whereas terrestrial, or OTA (over-the-air), radio stations are geographically restricted on the range of radio waves broadcast from a transmitter through the air, Internet radio stations are accessible from anywhere in the world, as long as there is a connection to the Internet, as services are not transmitted through the air but are delivered over the World Wide Web. On this receiver you can select Internet radio stations by genre as well as by region. Depending on the Internet line conditions, the sound may not be smooth when playing Internet radio.

About list of Internet radio

The list of Internet radio stations on this receiver is created, edited, and managed by the vTuner database service exclusively for use with this receiver. For details about vTuner, see vTuner on page 112.

Saving and retrieving Internet radio stations

You can easily save and retrieve saved Internet radio stations. See Advanced operations for Internet radio on page 51 for more on this. ! To listen to Internet radio stations, you must

have high-speed broadband Internet access. With a 56 K or ISDN modem, you may not enjoy the full benefits of Internet radio.

! The port number varies depending on the

Internet radio station. Check the firewall settings.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

! A list of Internet radio stations provided by the

vTuner database service is subject to change or deletion without notice due to various reasons.

! Broadcasts may be stopped or interrupted

depending on the Internet radio station. In this case, you cannot listen to a radio station selected from the list of Internet radio stations.

Registering broadcast stations not on the vTuner list from the special Pioneer site

With the receiver, broadcast stations not included on the list of station distributed by vTuner can be registered and played. Check the access code required for registration on the receiver, use this access code to access the special Pioneer Internet radio site and register the desired broadcast stations in your favorites. The address of the special Pioneer Internet radio site is: http://www.radio-pioneer.com

1 Display the Internet Radio list screen.

To display the Internet Radio list screen, perform steps 1 to 3 at Playback with Home Media Gallery on page 50.

2 Use i/j to select ‘Help’, then press ENTER.

3 Use i/j to select ‘Get access code’, then press ENTER.

The access code required for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed. Make a memo of this address. The following can be checked on the Help screen:

! Get access code – The access code required

for registration on the special Pioneer Internet radio site is displayed.

! Show Your WebID/PW – After registering

on the special Pioneer Internet radio site, the registered ID and password are displayed.

! Reset Your WebID/PW – Resets all the

information registered on the special Pioneer Internet radio site. When reset, all the registered broadcast stations are also cleared. If you want to listen to the same stations, re-register after resetting.

4 Access the special Pioneer Internet radio site from your computer and perform the registration process.

http://www.radio-pioneer.com Access the above site and use the access code in step 3 to perform user registration, following the instructions on the screen.

5 Register the desired broadcast stations as your favorites, following the instructions on the computer’s screen.

Both broadcast stations not on the vTuner list and stations on the vTuner list can be registered. In this case they are registered on the receiver as favorite broadcast stations and can be played.

Playing back your favorite songs

You can register up to 20 of your favorite songs or Internet radio stations in the Favorites folder. Note that only the audio files stored on components on the network can be registered.

Registering and deleting audio files and Internet radio stations in and from the Favorites folder

Press PGM while a song is being played back or stopped. The selected song is then registered in the Favorites folder. Up to 20 songs or Internet radio stations can be registered. To delete a registered song, select the Favorites folder, select the song you want to delete from the folder, and press CLR. The selected song is then deleted from the Favorites folder.

Advanced operations for Internet radio

Saving Internet radio stations

This receiver can remember the Internet radio stations that you often listen to in seven classes (A to G) with up to nine stations in each class to make the total of 63 stations at its maximum capacity.

1 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Tune into the Internet radio station that you want to save.

Tune into the desired Internet radio station by following Steps 1 to 3 on page 50.

3 Press T.EDIT to switch to the stationsaving mode.

4 Press CLASS to select the class that you want to save the station in.

Select the desired class from A to G.

5 Use i/j to select the number that you want to save the station as, and then press ENTER.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons. Select the desired number from 1 to 9.

Retrieving saved Internet radio stations

You need to save Internet radio stations first before retrieving them. If there are no Internet radio stations currently being saved, see Saving Internet radio stations on page 51 and save at least one Internet radio station before proceeding with the following steps.

1 SC-LX85 only: Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

2 Select the class that you want to retrieve an Internet radio station from.

Each time you press CLASS, the class switches to A to G in turn.

3 Use i/j to select the station number that you want to retrieve.

You can also select the station number by using the number buttons. ‘Preset Not Stored’ appears when you select an Internet radio station currently not being saved.

About network playback

The network playback function of this unit uses the following technologies:

Windows Media Player

See Windows Media Player 11/ Windows Media Player 12 on page 113 for more

on this.

Windows Media DRM

Microsoft Windows Media Digital Rights Management (WMDRM) is a platform to protect and securely deliver content for playback on computers, portable devices and network devices. Home Media Gallery functions as a WMDRM 10 for networked devices. WMDRM protected content can only be played on media servers supporting WMDRM.

Content owners use WMDRM technology to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses WMDRM software to access WMDRM protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the software’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected content. Revocation does not affect unprotected content. When you download licenses for protected content, you agree that

07 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content owners may require you to upgrade WMDRM to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the upgrade. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

DLNA

DLNA CERTIFIEDTM Audio Player

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics, computing industry and mobile device companies. Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home. The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies with DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this player, some setting changes of software or other devices may be required. Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information.

DLNATM, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDTM are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

Content playable over a network

! Even when encoded in a compatible format,

some files may not play correctly.

! If a file or Internet radio station cannot be

played, the next file or playable Internet radio station is played automatically.

! Movie or Photo files cannot be played back. ! There are cases where you cannot listen to an

Internet radio station even if the station can be selected from a list of radio stations.

! Some functions may not be supported

depending on the server type or version used.

! Supported file formats vary by server. As such,

files not supported by your server are not displayed on this unit. For more information check with the manufacturer of your server.

Disclaimer for Third Party Content

Access to content provided by third parties requires a high speed internet connection and may also require account registration and a paid subscription. Third party content services may be changed, suspended, interrupted, or discontinued at any time without notice, and Pioneer disclaims any liability in connection with such occurrences. Pioneer does not represent or warrant that content services will continue to be provided or available for a particular period of time, and any such warranty, express or implied, is disclaimed.

About playback behavior over a network

! Playback may stall when the PC is switched

off or any media files stored on it are deleted while playing content.

! If there are problems within the network

environment (heavy network traffic, etc.) content may not be displayed or played properly (playback may be interrupted or stalled). For best performance, a 100BASETX connection between player and PC is recommended.

! If several clients are playing simultaneously,

as the case may be, playback is interrupted or stalled.

! Depending on the security software installed

on a connected PC and the setting of such

software, network connection may be blocked. Pioneer is not responsible for any malfunction of the player and/or the Home Media Gallery features due to communication error/malfunctions associated with your network connection and/or your PC, or other connected equipment. Please contact your PC manufacturer or Internet service provider.

“Windows MediaTM” is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. Microsoft®, Windows®7, Windows®Vista, Windows®XP, Windows®2000, Windows®Millennium Edition, Windows®98, and WindowsNT® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs

About playable file formats

The Home Media Gallery feature of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats. Also, the compatibility of file formats varies depending on the type of server. Check with your server to ensure the compatibility of file formats supported by your server. ! Internet radio playback may be affected by the Internet communications environment, and in this

case playback may not be possible even with the file formats listed here.

Music files

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

MP3 <a>

LPCM

WAV .wav LPCM

WMA .wma

AAC

.mp3

—

.m4a .aac .3gp .3g2

MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3

LPCM

WMA2/7/8

WMA9

MPEG-4 AAC LC MPEG-4 HE AAC (aacPlus v1/2)

Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit

Channel 2 ch

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 192 kHz

Quantization bitrate 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit

Channel 2 ch

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 5 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate 16 bit

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate 16 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR Supported/Supported

Category Extension Stream

Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 192 kHz

Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit

FLAC .flac FLAC

a “MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.” b Only streaming data from servers is concerned, so there is no extension.

Channel 2 ch

Bitrate —

VBR/CBR —

08 Control with HDMI function

Control with HDMI function

About remote control operation

Important

! The procedure for setting the receiver

button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

About the Control with HDMI function

Synchronized operations below with a Control with HDMI-compatible Pioneer TV or Blu-ray Disc player or with a component of another make that supports the Control with HDMI functions are possible when the component is connected to the receiver using an HDMI cable. ! The receiver’s volume can be set and the

sound can be muted using the TV’s remote control.

! The receiver’s input switches over

automatically when the TV’s input is changed or a Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s power is also set to standby,

when the TV’s power is set to standby.

Important

! With Pioneer devices, the Control with HDMI

functions are referred to as “KURO LINK”.

! You cannot use this function with components

that do not support Control with HDMI.

! We only guarantee this receiver will work

with Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible components and components of other makes that support the Control with HDMI function. However, we do not guarantee that all synchronized operations will work with components of other makes that support the Control with HDMI function.

! Use a High Speed HDMI® cable when you

want to use the Control with HDMI function. The Control with HDMI function may not work properly if a different type of HDMI cable is used.

! For details about concrete operations,

settings, etc., refer to also the operating instructions for each component.

Making Control with HDMI connections

You can use synchronized operation for a connected TV and up to 7 other components. ! Be sure to connect the TV’s audio cable to

the audio input of this unit. When the TV and receiver are connected by HDMI connections, if the TV supports the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, the sound of the TV is input to the receiver via the HDMI OUT terminal, so there is no need to connect an audio cable. In this case, set TV Audio at HDMI Setup to via HDMI (see HDMI Setup on page 54).

For details, see Connecting your TV and playback components on page 25.

Important

! When connecting this system or changing

connections, be sure to switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.

! After this receiver is connected to an AC

Control with HDMI feature, see Control with HDMI function on page 54.

! To get the most out of this function, we

recommend that you connect your HDMI component not to a TV but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this receiver.

! The Control with HDMI function can be used

with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal, but not with a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal.

HDMI Setup

You must adjust the settings of this receiver as well as the connected Control with HDMIcompatible components in order to make use of the Control with HDMI function. For more information see the operating instructions for each component.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

3 Select ‘HDMI Setup’, then press ENTER.

4 Select the ‘Control’ setting you want.

Choose whether to set this unit’s Control with HDMI function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to ON to use the Control with HDMI function. When using a component that does not support the Control with HDMI function, set this to OFF.

! ON – Enables the Control with HDMI

function. When this unit’s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the Control with HDMI function, the audio and video outputs from the HDMI connection are output from the TV.

Also, by setting this to ON, the Auto Sound

Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link functions can be operated automatically by connecting a player supporting the respective functions. See Setting the Audio options on page 57 for details on Auto Sound Retriever Link, Setting the Video options on page 59 for details on Stream Smoother Link.

! OFF – The Control with HDMI is disabled.

Synchronized operations cannot be used. When this unit’s power is turned off, audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output.

5 Select the ‘Control Mode’ setting you want.

Choose whether you want to enable HDMI for all linked functions or the PQLS function only. However, Display Power Off will activate the settings set forth in step 6 below.

! ALL – Enabled for all linked functions. ! PQLS – Enabled only for the PQLS function.

When PQLS is selected, link functions other than the PQLS function may not work properly. If you wish to use all link functions, select ALL.

6 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting you want.

If the TV’s power is turned off while using the Control with HDMI function, the receiver’s

Control with HDMI function

power is also turned off (all power off function). This function can be disabled.

! YES – The all power off function is enabled.

The receiver’s power turns off together with the TV’s power. This function only works when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.

! NO – The all power off function is disabled.

The receiver’s power is not affected when the TV’s power is turned off.

7 Select the ‘Standby Through’ setting you want.

When Control is ON, the signals of the input device or TV connected to the receiver can be transferred even when the receiver’s power is in the standby mode (Standby Through mode). The power consumption in this Standby Through mode can be set to conserve energy.

! Normal – Regular mode. Power-up time from

the Standby Through mode is short.

! Eco – Power consumption in the Standby

Through mode is reduced. Some time is required for powering up from the Standby Through mode.

8 Select the ‘TV Audio’ setting you want.

When a TV supporting the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function is connected to the receiver, the sound of the TV can be input via the HDMI OUT terminal.

! Normal – The TV’s sound is input from the

Audio input terminals other than HDMI inputs.

! via HDMI – The TV’s sound is input via the

HDMI terminal. This can only be selected when Control is set to ON.

9 Select the ‘12V Trigger’ setting you want.

The component connected to the 12 V TRIGGER jack can be turned on and off when HDMI OUT is switched. HDMI OUT 1, HDMI OUT 2 or OFF can be selected. Select

OFF when you want the component to switch

when the input function is switched.

10 Select the ‘Speaker B Link’ setting you want.

The speaker terminal settings (the settings set with the SPEAKERS button) can be switched automatically when HDMI OUT is switched by turning the Speaker B Link setting on. This is only valid when “7.1ch + Speaker B” or “5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp” is selected for the Speaker System setting.

! OFF – The speaker terminal settings do not

switch automatically when HDMI OUT is switched.

! ON – The speaker terminal settings switch

automatically when HDMI OUT is switched. For details, see Switching the HDMI output on page 62.

11 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.

Before using synchronization

Once you have finished all connections and settings, you must:

1 Put all components into standby mode.

2 Turn the power on for all components, with the power for the TV being turned on last.

3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this receiver, and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not.

4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed.

About synchronized operations

The Control with HDMI-compatible component connected to the receiver operates in sync as described below. ! From the menu screen of the Control with

HDMI-compatible TV, set audio to be played through this receiver, and the receiver will switch to the synchronized amp mode.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, you

can adjust the receiver’s volume or mute the sound using the TV’s remote control.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, the

synchronized amp mode is canceled when the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn the synchronized amp mode back on, set audio to be played through the receiver from the TV’s menu screen, etc. This receiver will power up and switch to the synchronized amp mode.

! When the synchronized amp mode is

canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV program on the TV.

! When in the synchronized amp mode, the

synchronized amp mode is canceled if an operation that produces sound from the TV is performed from the TV’s menu screen, etc.

! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the

receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV.)

! The receiver’s input switches automatically

when the Control with HDMI-compatible component is played.

! The receiver’s input switches automatically

when the TV’s input is switched.

! The synchronized amp mode remains in

effect even if the receiver’s input is switched to a component other than one connected by HDMI.

The operations below can also be used on Pioneer Control with HDMI-compatible TVs.

! When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or the

sound is muted, the volume status is displayed on the TV’s screen.

! When the OSD language is switched on

the TV, the receiver’s language setting also switches accordingly.

About connections with a product of a different brand that supports the Control with HDMI function

The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected to a TV of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function. (Depending on the TV, however, some of the Control with HDMI functions may not work.) ! When the TV’s power is set to standby, the

receiver’s power is also set to standby. (Only when the input for a component connected to the receiver by HDMI connection is selected or when watching the TV)

! The sound of TV programs or an external

input connected to the TV can also be output from the speakers connected to the receiver. (If the TV does not support the HDMI ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, this requires connection of an optical digital cable, etc., in addition to the HDMI cable.)

The synchronized operations below can be used when the receiver’s Control with HDMI function is connected to a player or recorder of a brand other than Pioneer that supports the Control with HDMI function. ! When playback starts on the player or

recorder, the receiver’s input switches to the HDMI input to which that component is

connected. See the Pioneer website for the latest information on the models of non-Pioneer brands and products that support the Control with HDMI function.

08 Control with HDMI function

Setting the PQLS function

PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a digital audio signal transfer control technology using the Control with HDMI function. It offers higher-quality audio playback by controlling audio signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible player, etc. This enables removing jitter that has a negative effect on the quality of the sound and is generated upon transmission. ! On players compatible with PQLS Bit-stream,

PQLS always works for all sources.

! On players compatible with PQLS Multi

Surround, PQLS works for all sources. Set the player’s audio output to Linear PCM.

! On players compatible with PQLS 2 ch Audio,

PQLS only works when playing CDs. Please refer to the operating instructions supplied with your player for more information. This function is activated when Control is set to ON. ! If a listening mode other than

AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,

PURE DIRECT, OPTIMUM SURR or STEREO is

selected while the PQLS effect is enabled, the

PQLS effect is disabled. ! When this receiver is connected by HDMI

cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible

with the PQLS function via HDMI connection

and HDMI reauthentication is performed

(the HDMI indicator blinks), the PQLS effect

is enabled and the listening mode is set to

AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode other

than AUTO SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT,

PURE DIRECT, OPTIMUM SURR or STEREO is

selected.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press PQLS to select the PQLS setting.

The setting is displayed on the front panel display.

! PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A precision

quartz controller in this receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors (jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog conversion when you use the HDMI interface. This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLScompatible players.

! PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.

About Auto Sound Retriever Link and Stream Smoother Link

These are automatic functions allowing you to output optimum audio and video signals from the receiver using the Control with HDMI function. When a player supporting the respective function is connected to the receiver by HDMI, the sound/picture is optimized for the compressed audio/video file played on the player. ! Depending on the compressed audio/video file

format, it may not be operated automatically.

Auto Sound Retriever Link

When playing a compressed audio file on the player, the file’s bitrate information is acquired using the Control with HDMI function, and the sound is optimized on the receiver based on this information. To activate the Auto Sound Retriever Link function, make the setting below.

1 Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ALL.

See HDMI Setup on page 54.

2 Set the S.RTRV (Auto Sound Retriever) setting to ON.

See Setting the Audio options on page 57.

Stream Smoother Link

Using the Control with HDMI function, the receiver automatically detects whether a compressed video file is being played on the player, and if so automatically activates the Stream Smoother function. To activate the Stream Smoother Link function, make the setting below.

1 Set the HDMI Setup’s Control to ON, and set the Control Mode setting to ALL.

See HDMI Setup on page 54.

2 Set the STREAM (Stream Smoother) setting to AUTO.

See Setting the Video options on page 59.

Cautions on the Control with HDMI function

! Connect the TV directly to this receiver.

Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

! Only connect components (Blu-ray Disc

player, etc.) you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this receiver. Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI switch) can cause operational errors.

! When Control is set to ON, HDMI Input

in The Input Setup menu on page 36 is automatically set to OFF.

! When the receiver’s Control is turned ON,

even if the receiver’s power is in the standby mode, it is possible to output the audio and video signals from a player via HDMI to the TV without producing sound from the receiver, but only when a Control with HDMIcompatible component (Blu-ray Disc player, etc.) and compatible TV are connected. In this case, the receiver’s power turns on and the HDMI indicator lights.

Using other functions

About remote control operation

Important

! The procedure for setting the receiver operation mode differs for the remote controls included

with the SC-LX85 and SC-LX75. For the SC-LX85’s remote control, set the remote control operation selector switch to RECEIVER. For the SC-LX75’s remote control, press the button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Setting the Audio options

There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

! Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to the

current source, settings and status of the receiver.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press AUDIO PARAMETER.

2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use k/l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Audio parameter menu

Setting What it does Option(s)

MCACC (MCACC preset)

EQ (Acoustic Calibration EQ)

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset memories are saved. When an MCACC preset memory has been renamed, the given name is displayed.

Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.

c M1. MEMORY 1 to M6. MEMORY 6 d Default: M1. MEMORY 1

OFF

Setting What it does Option(s)

S-WAVE (Standing Wave)

Phase C+ (Phase Control Plus)

DELAY (Sound Delay)

TONE (Tone Control)

BASS

<a>

TREBLE

<a>

S.RTRV (Auto Sound Retriever)

DNR (Digital Noise Reduction)

DIALOG E (Dialog Enhancement) <c>

Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.

For discs created with standards other than Phase Control, the LFE channel is delayed upon recording in the first place. This function corrects for phase shifting on such discs.

Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation of the video.

Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses them completely.

Adjusts the amount of bass.

Adjusts the amount of treble.

With the Auto Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression, improving the sound’s sense of density and modulation. When ON is selected, the Sound Retriever effect is optimized based on the bitrate information of the contents input to the USB memory audio and HOME MEDIA GALLERY (digital audio input only) to achieve high sound quality. Also, when a player supporting the Auto Sound Retriever Link function is connected to the receiver by HDMI, by setting this to ON, the bitrate information of the compressed audio file being played on the player is acquired using the Control with HDMI function, and the sound is optimized based on this information (Auto Sound Retriever Link).

May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example, video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on. This only has an effect with 2-channel signal inputs.

Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. By moving from UP1 through UP2 and UP3 up to UP4, you can make the sound source seem to relocate upwards.

OFF

c 0 to 16 (ms) d Default: 6ms

c 0.0 to 10.0 (frames) d

1 second = 25 frames (PAL)

Default: 0.0

BYPASS

c –6 to +6 (dB) d Default: 0 (dB)

OFF

c OFF/FLAT/UP1/UP2/UP3/ UP4 d Default: OFF

09 Using other functions

Setting What it does Option(s)

OFF

SLOW (Hi-Sampling)

SHARP

SHORT

CH1 – Channel 1 is heard only

CH2 – Channel 2 is heard only

CH1 CH2 – Both channels heard from front speakers

OFF

AUTO

MAX

MID

OFF

c OFF/ –20dB/ –15dB/ –10dB/ –5dB/ 0dB d Default: 0dB

0dB

+6dB

AMP

THROUGH

Hi-bit32

DFILTER

(Digital Filter)

DUAL (Dual Mono)

Fixed PCM

DRC

(Dynamic Range Control) <d>

LFE (LFE Attenuate)

SACD GAIN

<e>

HDMI (HDMI Audio) <f>

Creates a wider dynamic range with digital sources like CDs, DVDs or BDs. Smoother, more delicate musical expression can be achieved by requantizing 16 bit PCM or 20 bit compressed audio signals or 24 bit compressed/ lossless audio signals to 32 bit.

Switches the AUDIO DAC (Digital Audio Converter) digital filter type. One of three settings can be selected:

SLOW (soft and warm), SHARP (solid and tight) and SHORT (quick and forward).

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate channels.

This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before OFF recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance. When ON is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.

Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).

Some audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers. The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20 dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When OFF is selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.

Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range (during digital processing).

Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver (amp) or through to a TV. When THROUGH is selected, no sound is output from this receiver.

Setting What it does Option(s)

OFF

c 0 to 7 d Default: 3

c –3 to +3 d Default: 0

OFF

c 0 to 1.0 d Defaults: Neo:X CINEMA: 1.0 Neo:X MUSIC: 0.3 Neo:X GAME: 1.0

c 10 to 90 d Defaults: EXT.STEREO: 90 Others: 50

LOW

MID

HIGH

OFF

MIN

MID

MAX

A.DELAY (Auto delay) <g>

C.WIDTH (Center Width) (Applicable only when using a center speaker) <h>

DIMENSION

<h>

PANORAMA

<h>

C.GAIN (Center Gain) (Applicable only when using a center speaker)

EFFECT

H.GAIN

(Height Gain)

V.SB (Virtual Surround Back) <j>

V.HEIGHT (Virtual Height) <k>

V.DEPTH (Virtual Depth) <l>

This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.

Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).

Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings).

Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a ‘wraparound’ effect.

Adjusts the center gain to create a wider stereo effect with vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front right and left speakers) to 1.0 (center channel sent to the center speaker only).

Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround or ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).

Adjusts the output from the front height speaker when listening in 2 Pro Logic IIz HEIGHT mode. If set to HIGH, the sound from the top will be more emphasized.

When you’re not using surround back speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround back channel through your surround speakers. You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information.

When you’re not using front height speakers, selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual front height channel through your front speakers.

When this mode is selected, the sound field expands virtually to behind the display, resulting in a sound field with the same depth as the 3D picture to achieve a better sense of presence.

a The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON. b With the iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY or ADAPTER PORT input function, by default S.RTRV is set to

ON.

c UP1 to UP4 can be selected only when the front height speaker is connected. The presence or absence of

effects depends on the listening mode.

d The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than

Dolby TrueHD.

e You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch

the gain setting back to 0dB.

f ! The HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations. ! The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input

signals from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See About synchronized operations on page

55.

g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing

capability (‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A.DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.

h Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode. i Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:X CINEMA/MUSIC/GAME mode. j ! You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when

any of the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

! You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to

NO or if the setting for not connecting surround back speakers is selected in the Speaker System settings.

k ! You can’t use the Virtual Height mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the

stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

! You can only use the Virtual Height mode if the surround speakers are on and the FH setting is set to NO or

if the setting for not connecting front height speakers is selected in the Speaker System settings. Also, the Virtual Height mode cannot be used when playing signals containing actual front height channel information.

l ! This mode is effective for contents with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or less. ! You can’t use the Virtual Depth mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of the

stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance, Sound Retriever Air or Stream Direct modes is selected.

! You can only use the Virtual Depth mode if the surround speakers are on.

Using other functions

Setting the Video options

There are a number of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.

Important

! Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is unavailable due to

the current source, setting and status of the receiver.

! All of the setting items can be set for each input function. ! Setting items other than V.CONV can only be selected when V.CONV is set to ON.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press VIDEO PARAMETER.

2 Use i/j to select the setting you want to adjust.

Depending on the current status/mode of the receiver, certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the table below for notes on this.

3 Use k/l to set as necessary.

See the table below for the options available for each setting.

4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.

Video parameter menu

Setting What it does Option(s)

V.CONV (Digital Video Converter) <a>

RES (Resolution)

PCINEMA (PureCinema) <c, e>

P.MOTION (Progressive Motion) <c, e>

Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT jacks (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types (see page 24).

Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to watch). (“576p” indicates the 480p/576p resolution setting.)

This setting optimizes the operation of the progressive scanning circuit for playing film materials. Normally set it to AUTO. If the picture seems unnatural, switch this to ON or OFF.

Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive.

OFF

AUTO

PURE

576p

720p

1080i

1080p

1080/24p

AUTO

OFF

c –4 to +4 d Default: 0

09 Using other functions

Setting What it does Option(s)

AUTO

OFF

PDP

LCD

FPJ

PRO

MEMORY

c 0 to +8 d Default: 0

c –6 to +6 d Default: 0

7.5

STREAM (Stream Smoother) <e>

V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust)

YNR

<d, e>

CNR

<d, e>

BNR

<d, e>

MNR

<d, e>

DETAIL

<d, e>

BRIGHT (Brightness) <d, e>

CONTRAST

<d, e>

HUE

<d, e>

CHROMA (Chroma Level) <d, e>

BLK SETUP (Black Setup) <f>

This improves elements that reduce picture quality mainly noticeable in network contents, such as mosquito noise and block noise. When AUTO is selected, this unit’s Stream Smoother function automatically turns on when network contents are played on the player supporting Stream Smoother and connected to this unit by HDMI (assuming that integrated operation with the Control with HDMI function is set). (Stream Smoother Link)

Sets the optimum picture quality for the type of monitor that is connected. Select PDP for plasma displays,

LCD for liquid crystal monitors, FPJ for front projectors, PRO for professional monitors. If you want to adjust the

picture quality settings to your personal tastes, select MEMORY.

Reduces noise in the luminance (Y) signal.

Reduces noise in the input’s color (C) signal.

Reduces block noise (block-shaped distortion generated upon MPEG compression) in the picture.

Reduces mosquito noise (distortion generated at the contours of the picture upon MPEG compression) in the picture.

Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

Adjusts the overall brightness.

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.

Adjusts the red/green balance.

Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.

Sets the black level according to the video input signal. Normally select 0. If the black level is too bright due to the combination with the connected monitor, select 7.5.

Setting What it does Option(s)

ASP (Aspect) <g>

a If the video picture deteriorates when this settings is switched ON, switch it OFF. b ! When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some

cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.

! When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)

connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input (see About the video converter on page 24).

! If this is set to something other than AUTO, PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are input, 480p/576p signals

are output from the component output terminals.

c ! This setting is valid for component outputs and HDMI output. ! P.MOTION is disabled when PCINEMA is set to ON. ! This setting have the effect only for pictures recorded in the interlaced scan format (480i/576i or 1080i sig-

nals).

d Adjustment is not possible unless V.ADJ (Advanced Video Adjust) is set to MEMORY. e ! This setting is only displayed when the video signals below are being input:

— 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i analog video signals — 480i, 576i, 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24 HDMI video signals

f This adjustment is only possible when 480i signals are being input from the composite video jacks. g ! If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the

monitor.

! This setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.

Specifies the aspect ratio when input signals are output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).

THROUGH

NORMAL

Using other functions

Switching the speaker terminals

If you selected 9.1ch FH/FW,

7.1ch + Speaker B, 7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2 or

5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp at Speaker system setting

on page 87, you can switch between speakers using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp,

7.1ch + ZONE 2, 5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2,

5.1ch + ZONE 2+3, 5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp

or 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp, the button will simply switch your main speaker terminals on or off.

% Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to select a speaker system setting.

As mentioned above, if you have selected

7.1ch Front Bi-Amp, 7.1ch + ZONE 2,

5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2, 5.1ch + ZONE 2+3,

5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp or 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp,

the button will simply switch your main speaker terminal (A) on or off. Press repeatedly to choose a speaker terminal option:

When you select 9.1ch FH/FW, you can select from:

! SP: FH/FW ON – Front height or front wide

channels are added to the front, center, surround and surround back channels (maximum 7 channels) and a maximum of 9 channels are output. The front height and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added

to the front, center, surround and surround back channels (maximum 7 channels) and a maximum of 9 channels are output.

! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added

to the front, center, surround and surround back channels (maximum 7 channels) and a maximum of 9 channels are output.

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

When you select 7.1ch + Speaker B, you can select from:

! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 9 channels (including front height channels), depending on the source).

! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two

speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel sources will not be heard.

! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 7 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker terminals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

When you select 7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2, you can select from:

! SP: FH/FW ON – Front height or front wide

channels are added to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output. The front height and front wide channels are switched automatically according to the audio input signal.

! SP: FH ON – Front height channels are added

to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: FW ON – Front wide channels are added

to the front, center and surround channels (maximum 5 channels) and a maximum of 7 channels are output.

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

When you select 5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp, you can select from:

! SP: A ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (maximum 5 channels).

! SP: B ON – Sound is output from the two

speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals. Multichannel sources will not be heard.

! SP: A+B ON – Sound is output from the

A-speaker terminals (up to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two speakers connected to the B-speaker terminals, and the subwoofer. The sound from the B-speaker terminals will be the same as the sound from the A-speaker terminals (multichannel sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).

! SP: OFF – No sound is output from the

speakers.

Note

! When 7.1ch + Speaker B or

5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp is selected for the Speaker System setting (page 87) and the Speaker B Link setting (HDMI Setup on page

54) is turned on, the setting of the played speaker terminals switches automatically when HDMI OUT is switched. For details, see Switching the HDMI output on page 62.

! The subwoofer output depends on the settings

you made in Manual speaker setup on page

87. However, if SP: B ON is selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).

! All speaker systems (except

7.1ch + Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls

The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust the sub zone volume and select sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on page 62.

1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel.

Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:

! ZONE 2 ON – Selects your primary (ZONE 2)

sub zone

! ZONE 2&3 ON – Select both sub zones ! ZONE 3 ON – Selects your secondary

(ZONE 3) sub zone

! MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTI-

ZONE feature off

The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.

2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the sub zone(s) you want.

If you selected ZONE 2&3 ON above, you can toggle between ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.

! When the receiver is on, make sure that any

operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) show in the display. If this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the main zone only.

If the receiver is in standby, the display is

dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub zone(s) continue to show in the display.

3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected.

For example, ZONE 2 DVD sends the source connected to the DVD inputs to the primary (ZONE 2) sub room.

! If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner

controls to select a preset station (see Saving station presets on page 41 if you’re unsure how to do this). The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.

4 When Speaker System is set to

7.1ch + ZONE 2, use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume for the sub zone.

09 Using other functions

5 When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL again to return to the main zone controls.

You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone(s).

! You won’t be able to switch the main zone

off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.

! If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE

feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.

MULTI-ZONE remote controls

The following table shows the possible MULTIZONE remote controls:

SC-LX85:

! Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch

to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to operate the

corresponding zone.

SC-LX75:

! Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 or ZONE 3

to operate the corresponding zone.

Button(s) What it does

Switches on/off power in the sub zone.

Use to select the input function in the sub zone.

Use to select the input function directly (this may not work for some functions) in the sub zone.

Use to set the listening volume in the sub zone.

INPUT SELECT

Input function buttons

SC-LX85:

VOL +/– <a>

SC-LX75:

MASTER VOLUME +/–

<a>

Button(s) What it does

MUTE

<a>

a You can only use this button when Speaker System

is set to 7.1ch + ZONE 2.

Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).

Making an audio or a video recording

You can make an audio or a video recording from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV). Keep in mind you can’t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the components you are recording to/from are hooked up in the same way (see Connecting your equipment on page 14 for more on connections). ! The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the

tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.

! Some digital sources are copy-protected, and

can only be recorded in analog.

! Some video sources are copy-protected. These

cannot be recorded.

Since the video converter is not available when making recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must connect your recorder using Component video if your source has also been connected using Component video.

1 Select the source you want to record.

Use the input function buttons (or

INPUT SELECT).

2 Prepare the source you want to record.

Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.

3 Select the input signal according to the signal to be recorded.

Use the remote control’s SIGNAL SEL button.

4 Prepare the recorder.

Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording device and set the recording levels. Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically-check the component’s instruction manual if you’re unsure.

5 Start recording, then start playback of the source component.

Reducing the level of an analog signal

The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find that the OVER indicator lights often or you can hear distortion in the sound. The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press A.ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off.

Using the sleep timer

The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use the remote control to set the sleep timer.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.

30 min 60 min

Off 90 min

! You can check the remaining sleep time at

any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again.

! The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If

any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.

Dimming the display

You can choose between four brightness levels for the front panel display. Note that when selecting sources, the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front panel display.

! You can also choose to turn the display off. In

this case, the FL OFF indicator lights.

Switching the HDMI output

Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals. The HDMI OUT 1 terminal is compatible with the Control with HDMI function.

% Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HDMI OUT.

Please wait a while when Please wait ... is displayed. The output switches among HDMI OUT ALL, HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 each time the button is pressed.

Using other functions

! The synchronized amp mode is canceled

when the HDMI output is switched. If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode, switch to HDMI OUT 1, then select the synchronized amp mode on the TV using the TV’s remote control.

About the Speaker B Link function

When 7.1ch + Speaker B or

5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp is selected for the Speaker System setting (page 87) and the Speaker B Link setting (HDMI Setup on page

54) is turned on, the setting of the played speaker terminals switches automatically when HDMI OUT is switched. The settings switch as follows: ! HDMI OUT ALL – Switches to SP: A+B ON.

Sound is output simultaneously in the room where the A speakers are located and in the room where the B speakers are located.

! HDMI OUT 1 – Switches to SP: A ON. Sound

is only output in the room where the A speakers are located.

! HDMI OUT 2 – Switches to SP: B ON. Sound

is only output in the room where the B speakers are located.

Checking your system settings

Use the status display screen to check your current settings for features such as surround back channel processing and your current MCACC preset.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press STATUS to check the system settings.

The front panel display shows each of the following settings for three seconds each: Input

Source d Sampling Frequency d MCACC preset d ZONE 2 input d ZONE 3 input d HDMI OUT.

2 When you’re finished, press STATUS again to switch off the display.

Resetting the system

Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to MULTI ZONE OFF. ! Disconnect the iPod and USB memory device

from the receiver beforehand.

! Set the Control with HDMI to OFF (see HDMI

Setup on page 54).

1 Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON.

The display shows RESET c NO d.

3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET k/l, then press ENTER on the front panel.

The display shows RESET? OK.

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

OK appears in the display to indicate that the

receiver has been reset to the factory default settings.

! Note that all settings will be saved, even if the

receiver is unplugged.

Default system settings

Setting Default

Digital Video Converter ON

SPEAKERS FH/FW

Speaker System 9.1ch FH/FW

Front SMALL

Center SMALL

Speaker Setting

Surround Position IN REAR

Crossover 80 Hz

X-Curve OFF

DIMMER

Inputs

See Input function default and possible settings on page 36.

HDMI

HDMI Audio Amp

HDMI output

Control ON

Control Mode ALL

Display Power Off YES

Audio playback

Power On Level LAST

Volume Limit OFF

Mute Level FULL

Phase Control ON

Auto Sound Retriever

FH/FW SMALL

Surr SMALL

SB SMALLx2

SW YES

Medium bright

HDMI OUT ALL

iPod/USB, HOME MEDIA GALLERY, ADAPTER PORT input function

Other input functions

OFF

Setting Default

Sound Delay 0.0 frame

Dual Mono CH1

DRC AUTO

SACD Gain 0 dB

LFE Attenuate 0 dB

Auto delay OFF

Digital Safety OFF

Effect Level

2 PL II Music Options

Neo:X Options Center Gain

2 PL IIz Options

All Inputs

See also Setting the Audio options on page 57 for other default DSP settings.

MCACC

MCACC Position Memory

Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB

Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 3.00 m

Standing Wave (M1 to M6)

EQ Data (M1 to M6)

ExtendedStereo 90

Other modes 50

Center Width 3

Dimension 0

Panorama OFF

Neo:X CINEMA: 1.0 Neo:X MUSIC: 0.3 Neo:X GAME: 1.0

Height Gain MID

Listening Mode (2 ch/multi ch)

Listening Mode (Headphones)

ATT of all channels/filters

SWch Wide Trim 0.0 dB

All channels/ bands

EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB

AUTO SURROUND

STEREO

M1: MEMORY 1

0.0 dB

10 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX85)

About the Remote Setup menu

Important

! This section includes explanations for the SC-

LX85’s remote control. For instructions for the

SC-LX75’s remote control, see Controlling the

rest of your system (In case of SC-LX75) on page

74.

The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the HOME MENU button while pressing MULTI OPERATION. The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the respective items.

Setting What it does

Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control codes of a number of other devices (including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated. See Selecting preset codes directly on page 65.

If the desired operations cannot be performed even though you have set the preset codes, the remote control signals of other devices can be learned directly. See Programming signals from other remote controls on page 65.

A series of the remote control operations for starting listening or viewing can be programmed. Multiple remote control codes can be set for the different input functions. See Multi Opera- tion and System Off on page 67.

PRESET RECALL

CODE LEARNING

MULTI OPERATE

Setting What it does

This is a function for automatically

SYSTEM OFF

DIRECT FUNC

RENAME

SYNC RENAMING

ERASE LEARNING

IR/RF SELECT

turning off the power of devices connected to the receiver. Multiple remote control codes can be set, as desired. See Multi Operation and System Off on page 67.

This is a setting for changing only the remote control unit’s operation screen, without changing the receiver’s input, when the remote control unit’s input function buttons are pressed. This is convenient for using the remote control unit for devices not connected to the receiver. See Direct function on page 66.

The names of the input function buttons displayed on the remote control unit can be changed as desired. See

Renaming input function names manually on page 66.

Input function names changed on the receiver can be acquired by the remote control unit so that the names are the same on the remote control unit. See

Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver on page 72.

This function is used to erase remote control codes that have been learned. Codes learned for the different input functions can be erased individually. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 66.

This function is for selecting wireless (RF) or infrared (IR) as the remote control operating mode for the different devices. See Operating this receiver by

RF communications on page 71 and Operating other components by RF communications on page 71.

Setting What it does

The remote control unit’s operation screen switches automatically when

OPERATION MODE

KEY RESET

ALL RESET

READ PRESET ID

CHANGE RC MODE

EXIT SETUP

the receiver’s input is switched (This is only valid when the operation selector switch is set to SOURCE). See Setting the remote control operation mode on page 72.

This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input functions. See Resetting the input

assignment of one of the input function buttons on page 66.

This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment from the factory. See Resetting the remote control settings on page 66.

The preset codes set for the different input functions can be checked. See Confirming preset codes on page 66.

If you have multiple Pioneer receivers, amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See Operating multiple receivers on page 64.

Exits the setup menu.

Note

! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by press

and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds. To go back a step, press RETURN.

! After one minute of inactivity, the remote

automatically exits the operation.

Operating multiple receivers

The remote control included with this receiver can be used to operate up to three other receivers (of the same model as this receiver) in addition to this receiver. The receiver to be operated

is switched by inputting the preset code to set the remote control setting. ! This function is only valid when RECEIVER

is set to IR MODE at the remote control’s IR/RF SELECT setting (page 71).

! Set the remote modes on the receivers before

using this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 92).

1 Check that the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE selector switch is set to MAIN and that the operation selector switch is set to RECEIVER.

2 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

3 Use i/j to select ‘CHANGE RC MODE’, then press ENTER.

4 Use i/j to select the remote mode.

RC MODE 1 to 4 can be selected.

5 Press ENTER to set the remote mode.

The selected mode flashes for 3 seconds. To operate another receiver, start over from step 1 to input its preset code.

Setting the remote to control other components

Most components can be assigned to one of the input function buttons (such as DVD or CD) using the component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote. However, there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using. If you can’t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming sig- nals from other remote controls on page 65).

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

TV CONTROL

! For greater convenience, assign the TV

connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV operation selector switch, and assign your satellite/cable receiver or set-top box connected to the TV/SAT input terminal to the TV input button. If a single device is connected to both terminals, that device should be assigned to both the TV operation selector switch and TV input buttons.

! Devices may be assigned to the following

input function buttons.

MAIN

RECEIVERSOURCE

ZONE2 3

MULTI

MULTI OPERATION

OPERATION

DVD

TUNER

MULTI CH

INPUT SELECT

BDR

NET RADIO

HMG

OPTION

VIDEO

HDMIDVR

ADAPTER

CD-R

USB iPod

PHONO

AUX

Selecting preset codes directly

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘PRESET RECALL’, then press ENTER.

3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control, then press ENTER.

When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, set the remote control operation selector switch to TV here. The remote display shows the component you want to control (for example DVD or TV).

! You can’t assign TUNER, HMG NET RADIO,

ADAPTER and iPod USB.

4 Use i/j to select the first letter of the brand name of your component, then press ENTER.

This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P for Pioneer).

5 Use i/j to select the manufacturer’s name from the list, then press ENTER.

6 Use i/j to select the proper code from the list, then try using this remote with your component.

The code should start with the component type (for example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with the first one. To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

! If you can’t find or properly enter a preset

code, you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 65).

! When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please

select PIONEER DVR 450, 451 or 452.

! When using a Pioneer flat panel TV released

prior to summer 2005, please select preset code 644.

7 If your component is controlled successfully, press ENTER to confirm.

The remote display shows OK.

Programming signals from other remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code.

The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only). Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

MAIN

RECEIVER SOURCE

ZONE2

3 MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

USB

iPod

MULTI CH

PHONO

AUX

TV CONTROL

INPUTMUTEMUTE

DVD

NET RADIO

HMG

OPTION

TUNER

VIDEO

INPUT SELECT LIGHT

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

HDMIDV R

ADAPTER

CD-R

VOL

INPUTMUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL PTY SEARCH

STATUS

THXPQLSMP

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

STEREO

PGMMENU

SIGNAL SELSLEEP AUDIO

A.ATT

D.ACCESS

CLR

PARAMETER

TUNE

TOOLS

ENTER

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

STANDARD ADV SURR

DIMMER

INFO

SBchMCACC

DISP

HDMI OUT

CLASS

ENTER

MUTE

VIDEO

T.EDIT GUIDE

RETURN

EMORY

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘CODE LEARNING’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the component you want to control (for example DVD or TV).

3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control, then press ENTER.

PRESS KEY blinks in the remote display.

! You can’t assign TUNER, HMG NET RADIO,

ADAPTER and iPod USB.

! The TV CONTROL buttons (u, VOL +/–,

CH +/–, MUTE and INPUT) can only be

learned after the operation selection switch is set to TV.

4 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

PRESS KEY lights continuously to indicate the

remote is ready to accept a signal.

! The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.

CD-R

HDMIDVR

ADAPTER

Other remote control

3 cm

OPTION

MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

HMG

NET RADIO

DVD

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE2

USB

iPod

RECEIVER SOURCE

This receiver’s remote control

RECEIVER

VIDEO

INPUT SELECT LIGHT

MULTI CH

PHONO

VOLCH

SOURCE

AUX

5 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.

For example, if you want to learn the playback control signal, press and hold d briefly. The remote display will shows OK if the operation has been learned. If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the remote display will shows ERROR briefly, and then display PRESS KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching) button as you vary the distance between the two remotes, until the remote display shows OK.

6 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 4 and 5.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 1 through 5.

7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation(s).

VOL

10 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

Note

! Note that interference from TVs or other

devices will sometimes result in the remote

control learning the wrong signal. ! Some commands from other remote controls

cannot be learned, but in most cases the

remotes just need to be moved closer together

or farther apart. ! If the remote display shows MEMORY FULL,

it means the memory is full. See Erasing one

of the remote control button settings on page

66 to erase a programmed button you’re not

using to free up more memory (note that some

signals may take more memory than others). ! Depending on the type of command that has

been learned, operation may not be possible

with RF two-way communications. In this

case, operate using IR signal transmission.

For instructions on switching between

the IR and RF modes, see Operating other

components by RF communications on page

71.

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘ERASE LEARNING’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased.

3 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased, then press ENTER.

The remote display flashes PRESS KEY.

4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two seconds.

The remote display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the button has been erased.

5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.

6 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds when you’re done.

Resetting the input assignment of one of the input function buttons

This procedure resets the input assignment preset at the remote control’s input function button, restoring the default.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘KEY RESET’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased.

3 Press the input function button for the component whose input assignment you want to reset, then press and hold ENTER for a couple of seconds.

The remote display shows OK when the input assignment of the remote control’s input function button is reset.

Resetting the remote control settings

Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default. When preset codes are set, all the signals learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘ALL RESET’, then press ENTER.

ALL RESET flashes in the remote display.

3 Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds.

The remote display shows OK to confirm the remote presets have been erased.

Confirming preset codes

Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned to an input function button.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘READ PRESET ID’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the input function button you want to check.

3 Press the input function button of the component for which you want to check the preset code, then press ENTER.

The brand name and preset code appears in the display for three seconds.

Renaming input function names manually

You can customize the names that appear on the remote display when you select an input function (for example, you could change the name of DVR/BDR to DVR-LX61).

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘RENAME’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the button of the input function you want to rename.

3 Press the input function button you want to rename then press ENTER.

The TV CONTROL name can be changed when the remote control operation selector switch is switched to TV. To change the names of the input functions, set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE.

4 Use i/j to select ‘NAME EDIT’, then press ENTER.

To reset the button to its original (default) name, select NAME RESET above.

5 Edit the name of the input function in the remote control display, pressing ENTER when you’re finished.

Use i/j to change the character and k/l to move forward/back a position. The name can be up to 14 characters.

Direct function

! Default setting: ON You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

TV CONTROL

use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player. When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input function buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without affecting the receiver.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘DIRECT FUNC’, then press ENTER.

The remote display prompts you for the button of the input function you want to control.

3 Press the input function button for the component you want to control, then press ENTER.

! You can’t use direct function TUNER, HMG

NET RADIO, ADAPTER and iPod USB.

4 Use i/j to switch direct function ON or OFF, then press ENTER.

The remote display shows OK to confirm the setting.

Multi Operation and System Off

The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 6 commands for the components in your system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two buttons on the remote control. Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use one button to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time. ! Before Multi Operation and System Off will

work correctly, you must setup the remote to

work with your TV and other components (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 64 for more on this).

! Some units may take some time to power up,

in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

! Power on and off commands only work with

components that have a standby mode.

! Up to 5 commands can be programmed for

System Off.

Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence

Set the remote control operation mode selector switch to RECEIVER when you want to program this receiver’s operations, to SOURCE when you want to program operations of other components.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘MULTI OPERATE’ or ‘SYSTEM OFF’ from the menu and press ENTER.

If you selected Multi Operation (MULTI OPERATE), the remote display prompts you for an input function button. If you selected System Off (SYSTEM OFF), go to step 4.

3 Press the input function button for the component that will start the multioperation, then press ENTER.

For example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD.

4 Use i/j to select ‘EDIT CODE’, then press ENTER.

To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or shutdown sequences) select CLEAR CODE above.

5 Use i/j to select a command in the sequence, then press ENTER.

If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in the sequence. PRESS KEY flashes after you press ENTER.

6 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input.

This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input function).

7 Select the button for the command you want to input.

The following remote control commands can be selected:

MAIN

RECEIVER SOURCE

ZONE2

3 MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

USB

iPod

MULTI CH

PHONO

AUX

TV CONTROL

INPUTMUTEMUTE

DVD

NET RADIO

HMG

OPTION

TUNER

VIDEO

INPUT SELECT LIGHT

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

HDMIDV R

ADAPTER

CD-R

VOL

INPUTMUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL PTY SEARCH

STATUS

THXPQLSMP

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

STEREO

PGMMENU

SIGNAL SELSLEEP AUDIO

A.ATT

D.ACCESS

CLR

PARAMETER

TUNE

TOOLS

ENTER

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

STANDARD ADV SURR

DIMMER

INFO

SBchMCACC

DISP

HDMI OUT

CLASS

ENTER

MUTE

VIDEO

T.EDIT GUIDE

RETURN

EMORY

! You don’t need to program the receiver to

switch on or off. This is done automatically.

With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:

! program the power to switch off in a

shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders); These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).

8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to program a sequence of commands.

9 When you’re finished, use i/j to select ‘EDIT EXIT’ from the menu and press ENTER.

You will return to the remote control Setup menu. Select EXIT SETUP to exit.

Using multi operations

You can start multi operations with the receiver switched on, or in standby.

MAIN

RECEIVER SOURCE

ZONE23

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD

TUNER

MULTI CH

BDR

HDMIDVR

NET RADIO

HMG

ADAPTER

OPTION

USB

iPod

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

MULTI OPERATE flashes in the display.

2 Press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

! With this remote control, the IR and RF

modes can be selected separately for the individual input functions. To perform a multi operation on a device (input function) for which the IR mode is selected, point the remote control toward the remote sensor on that device.

10 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

Using System off

MAIN

RECEIVER SOURCE

ZONE23

MULTI

OPERATION

DVD

TUNER

MULTI CH

BDR

HDMIDVR

NET RADIO

HMG

ADAPTER

OPTION

USB iPod

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

MULTI OPERATE flashes in the display.

2 Press u SOURCE.

The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch off, followed by this receiver.

! In order to avoid accidently switching off a

DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

! With this remote control, the IR and RF

modes can be selected separately for the individual input functions. To turn off the power of a device (input function) for which the IR mode is selected using the System Off function, point the remote control toward the remote sensor on that device.

! When the power code of another brand is

registered, the power on/off operation may be inverted. When using the System Off function for a multi operation including the power codes of other brands, always check that the power of all the components has turned off.

Controlling components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Selecting preset codes directly on page 65). Set the remote control operation selector switch to SOURCE, then press the input function buttons to select the component. ! TV CONTROL on the remote control are

dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV operation selector switch. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV operation selector switch.

MAIN

RECEIVER SOURCE

ZONE2

3 MULTI

OPERATION

BDR

DVD

USB iPod

TUNER

MULTI CH

PHONO

AUX

TV CONTROL

INPUT MUTE

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU

BAND

PRESET PRESET

CATEGORY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL PTY SEARCH

STATUS

THXPQLSMPX MEMORY

AUTO/ALC/

DIRECT

STEREO

PGMMENU

SIGNAL SELSLEEP AUDIO

A.ATT

D.ACCESS

CLR

NET RADIO

HMG

OPTION

VIDEO

INPUT SELECT LIGHT

SOURCE

RECEIVER

VOL

PARAMETER

TUNE

TOOLS

ENTER

TUNE

PHASE CTRL CH LEVEL

STANDARD ADV SURR

DIMMER

INFO

SBch MCACC

HDMI OUT

CLASS

ENTER

HDMIDV R

ADAPTER

CD-R

VOL

MUTE

VIDEO

T.EDIT GUIDE

GUIDE

RETURN

DISP

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

TV and Audio/Video components

Button(s) TV TV (Monitor) BD/DVD

u SOURCE

Number buttons numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics

!/CLR k (dot)

ENTER (CLASS) CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER CLEAR — ENTER

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

PGM (Red) Red Red — HDD/DVD — Red

MENU (Green) Green Green — MENU — Green

(Yellow)

(Blue)

AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

g + n

a Controls for BD.

POWER ON/ OFF

EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU

TOOLS/GUIDE USER MENU

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER

HOME MENU HOME MENU

RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN — RETURN

Yellow Yellow — VCR — Yellow

Blue Blue MENU TV/DTV — Blue

— —

— AUTO SETUP

— FREEZE

— —

ANT AV SELECTION

— SCREEN SIZE

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY —

CH +/– CH +/–

— — — — — RECORD

POWER ON/OFF

KURO LINK CLEAR + —

POWER ON/OFF

TOOLS <a>

HOME MENU

d d d d

e e e C/e

g g g D/g

m m m A/m

n n n n

o o o B/o

p p p E/p

OUTPUT RESOLUTION +/– <a>

HDD/ BDR/DVR

POWER ON/OFF

TOP MENU/ DISC NAVI

GUIDE — GUIDE

HOME MENU

CH +/– CH +/– CH +/–

VCR

POWER ON/OFF

— LIST

—

— HOME

SAT/ CATV

POWER ON/OFF

i/j/k/l

DISPLAY/ INFO

Audio/Video components

Button(s) LD

u SOURCE

Number buttons numerics numerics numerics —

!/CLR

ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER — ENTER

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

PGM (Red) — PROGRAM — —

(Yellow)

(Blue)

d d d d d

e e e e e

g g g g g

m m m m m

n n n n n

o o o

p p p

AUDIO

DISP

a Controls for MD. b Controls for SACD. c Controls for DAT.

POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF

+10 >10/CLEAR

TOP MENU — — —

—

ENTER — —

—

RETURN — — —

— REPEAT — —

— SHUFFLE — —

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

CD/CD-R/ SACD

LEGATO LINK

— —

SACD SETUP

PURE AUDIO

TIME

MD/DAT TAPE

CLEAR <a>

— —

o/MS– <c>

p/MS+ <c>

— —

CLEAR

e/g/m/n

10 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

TV (Projector)

Button(s) TV (Projector)

u SOURCE

!/CLR

ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

POWER ON

MOVIE

STANDARD

DYNAMIC

USER1

USER2

USER3

COLOR+

SHARP+

GAMMA

COLOR–

SHARP–

EXIT

INFO

ENTER

TEST

HIDE

HDMI1

HDMI2

COMP.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

BRIGHT–

BRIGHT+

POWER OFF

ASPECT

CONTRAST+/–

Using the RF communications function

IR blaster (only required when you want to operate other components by RF two-way communications) (max. 4 components)

Operation of the receiver or

other components placed in

a rack is possible

Operation is possible in any

direction the remote control

is pointed (360°)

With this receiver, two-way communications between the receiver and remote control are possible by connecting the included RF adapter to the RS-232C and CU-RF100 terminals. For instructions on connecting the RF adapter, see Connecting the RF adapter on page 15. Two-way communications allow you to use the following functions: ! The receiver can be operated by pointing

the remote control in any direction (360º) (maximum line-of-sight distance for two-way communications: about 10 meters).

! Operate is possible without being affected

by obstacles (even products in racks can be operated).

Remote control operation

! The information shown on the receiver’s

display can be displayed on the remote control’s display as you operate.

! RF communications can be used to operate

up to 4 other components connected to the receiver (using the included IR blaster. For details, see Operating other components by RF communications on page 71).

! The remote control input display names

can be synchronized with the input names changed at Input Name on the receiver’s Input Setup menu (page 36) and acquired automatically. For details, see Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver on page 72.

MONITOR

OUT

ZONE2

OUT

RS-232C

CU-RF100

(

OUTPUT 5 V

150 mA MAX

Receiver

RF Adapter

AM LOOP

ANTENNA

OUT

)

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

! When the receiver’s input is switched, the

remote control’s display and operating mode switch to that input automatically. For details, see Setting the remote to control other components on page 64.

Important

! The line-of-sight communications distance is a

rough indication, and may differ according to the surrounding environment.

! Depending on the communications

environment, functions using two-way communications between the receiver and remote control may not operate properly. For details, including cautions on the communications environment and usage procedure, etc., see Precautions when using the Omni-Directional RF Remote Control on page 72.

Note

! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by press

and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds. To go back a step, press RETURN.

Pairing the RF adapter and remote control

Pairing is necessary in order to use the RF communications function. Perform the operation below after connecting the RF adapter and receiver.

1 Switch on the receiver.

2 Set the RF Remote Setup on this receiver’s Other Setup menu to ON.

For details, see RF Remote Setup on page 92.

3 Press the SETTING button on the front of the RF adapter.

RF adapter’s LED blinks red.

4 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press VIDEO PARAMETER on the remote control.

The remote display shows PAIRING.

5 Press ENTER on the remote control.

AUTHORIZATION flashes and pairing is per-

formed. When pairing is successful, SUCCESS is displayed and pairing is completed. RF adapter’s LED lights green. If ERROR is displayed, pairing has not been successful. Check the connections and distance with the RF adapter, then start over from step 1. The remote control unit’s receiver operation mode must be set to “RF” in order to operate the receiver with RF two-way communications. Make this setting as described at Operating this receiver by RF communications on page 71.

Operating this receiver by RF communications

Use this procedure to make the remote control settings to operate the receiver using RF two-way communications. The settings can be made individually for the main zone, ZONE 2 and ZONE 3. Connect the receiver and RF adapter and pair the RF adapter and remote control unit beforehand.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘IR/RF SELECT’, then press ENTER.

Check that the units are paired. If RECEIVER MAIN is displayed, pairing has been performed properly, so proceed to step 3. If RF MODE ONLY flashes, pairing has not been performed properly, so perform this procedure again after performing pairing (see Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on page 71).

3 Use i/j to select the receiver zone for which you want to use RF two-way communications, then press ENTER.

4 Use i/j to select ‘RF MODE’, then press ENTER.

Select IR MODE to return to operation by infrared signal. When RECEIVER is selected and RF MODE is set at step 3, HMG NET RADIO, ADAPTER, iPod USB and TUNER are automatically set to the RF mode. Note that RF MODE cannot be set for OPTION 1 and OPTION 2.

5 If you want to operate other zones with RF two-way communications, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Operating other components by RF communications

Up to 4 other components connected to the receiver can be operated by RF communications. Use the IR blaster to communicate between the RF adapter and other components, and switch the remote control’s setting to RF. The remote control’s setting can be switched individually for each input.

To mount on a shelf above the component

Double-faced tape

Remote control sensor

Rack

To mount on the component

Doublefaced tape

Remote control sensor

1 Connect the IR blaster cable to the RF Adapter’s IR Blaster terminal and mount the transmitter on the component you want to operate with RF communications.

RF adapter

10 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

! Operation is not possible unless the IR

blaster is mounted in an appropriate position. Whenever possible, mount it above the other component’s remote control sensor. If mounted below, the influence of external light, etc., could hamper reception.

! Mount the IR blaster securely to a position

near the other component’s remote control sensor. For the location of the other component’s remote control sensor, see the component’s operating instructions.

! Clean any dirt or dust off the place at which

the double-faced tape is to be attached beforehand.

! Note that the double-faced tape is strong,

and that trying to peel it off the shelf, etc., after it has been applied may damage the shelf’s surface.

2 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

3 Use i/j to select ‘IR/RF SELECT’, then press ENTER.

Check that the units are paired. If RECEIVER MAIN MAIN is displayed, pairing has been performed properly, so proceed to step

4. If RF MODE ONLY flashes, pairing has not been performed properly, so perform this procedure again after performing pairing (see Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on page 71).

4 Use i/j to select input function for the component you want to operate using RF communications, then press ENTER.

Select the input component to which the IR blaster was mounted in step 1.

5 Use i/j to select ‘RF MODE’, then press ENTER.

Select IR MODE to return to operation by infrared signal.

6 If other input function buttons also switch to RF communications operation, repeat step 4 to 5.

7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation(s).

Renaming input function names in synchrony with the receiver

! Default setting: MANUAL The remote control input display names can be synchronized with the input names that have been changed at Input Name on the receiver’s Input Setup menu (page 36) and acquired automatically. There are two modes: AUTO in which the receiver’s input names are acquired automatically each time the input is switched, and MANUAL in which the receiver’s input names are only acquired for input functions selected manually. Even when input names are changed manually at Renaming input function names manually on page 66, when synchro renaming is performed here, the input name is overwritten.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘SYNC RENAMING’, then press ENTER.

MANUAL flashes in the remote display.

If RF MODE ONLY flashes, pairing has not been performed properly or RECEIVER may be set to IR MODE at the remote control’s IR/RF SELECT setting. In this case, perform pairing, then switch RECEIVER to RF MODE at the remote control’s IR/RF SELECT setting. For details, see Pairing the RF adapter and remote

control on page 71 and Operating this receiver by RF communications on page 71.

3 Use i/j to select ‘AUTO’ or ‘MANUAL’, then press ENTER.

If you selected AUTO, this completes the setting. The receiver’s input names are acquired

automatically in synchrony with the receiver each time the remote control’s input is switched. Proceed to step 7. If you selected MANUAL, go to step 4.

4 Press the input function button for the component whose receiver input name you want to acquire, then press ENTER.

The receiver’s input name is acquired. After PLEASE WAIT is displayed, the receiver’s input name flashes. If the name has not been changed at Input Name on the receiver’s Input Setup menu (page 36), NO CHANGE flashes. The HDMI input function button is not supported.

5 Press ENTER to enter the input name displayed on the remote control.

COMPLETE is displayed and the input name is

registered.

6 To acquire the receiver input names for other input function buttons, repeat step 4 to 5.

7 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation(s).

Setting the remote control operation mode

! Default setting: SYNCHRO ON When the remote control operation mode is turned on and the receiver’s input is switched, the remote control display and operation mode switch automatically to that input. Select SYNCHRO OFF if you do not want the remote control’s function to switch automatically when the receiver’s input is switched. ! When the remote control’s input is switched,

the receiver’s input also switches, but for functions for which the remote control direct function (page 66) is set to off, when the remote control’s input is switched, the

receiver’s input does not switch and only the remote control unit’s operating screen switches.

! The remote control operation mode is only

valid when the remote control operation selector switch is set to SOURCE.

1 While pressing MULTI OPERATION, press HOME MENU.

The remote display shows SETUP MENU.

2 Use i/j to select ‘OPERATION MODE’, then press ENTER.

Check that the units are paired. If SYNCHRO ON is displayed, pairing has been performed properly, so proceed to step 3. If RF MODE ONLY flashes, pairing has not been performed properly, so perform this procedure again after performing pairing (see Pairing the RF adapter and remote control on page 71).

3 Use i/j to select ‘SYNCHRO ON’ or ‘SYNCHRO OFF’, then press ENTER.

The remote display shows OK to confirm the setting.

4 Press and hold MULTI OPERATION for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation(s).

Precautions when using the Omni-Directional RF Remote Control

Precautions regarding wavelength

! This remote control is designed to prevent

other persons from eavesdropping on the transmitted signals, but precautions should nonetheless be taken against the chance that other persons’ could intercept and listen to the signals transmitted. Given that this remote control produces radio wave transmissions, another person could deliberately use

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85)

a receiver to attempt to intercept such transmissions. As a result, this device should not be used to play important transmissions

demanding privacy. This remote control utilizes the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This band is also used by a variety of other devices as noted below. In particular, devices not often cognizant to the user are listed in item 2.

1 Examples of common devices utilizing the 2.4 GHz band:

! Cordless phone ! Cordless facsimile ! Microwave oven ! Wireless LAN router ! Wireless AV device ! Wireless controllers for games ! Microwave therapeutic devices ! Bluetooth wireless technology devices

2 Other devices using 2.4 GHz:

! Shoplifting-prevention systems ! Amateur wireless radio ! Distribution control systems at factories and

warehouses

! Railway and emergency vehicle wireless

identification systems When such devices are used simultaneously with this remote control, signal interference may occur, resulting in signal dropouts. To improve reception quality, try the following:

! Turn off the other device emitting radio

waves.

! Place the interfering device farther away

(Move both the remote control and RF

adapter away from the interfering device). Do not use this remote control in the following locations, since transmission interruption may result:

! Locations where another device using the

same 2.4 GHz frequency is being used, such

as a Bluetooth wireless technology device

or wireless LAN, or in the vicinity where the

magnetic field, static electricity, or radio

wave interference from another device may occur (depending on the environment, radio waves may not transmit effectively).

! Move the radio farther away. ! If visual noise appears on the television

screen, it is possible that this remote control is producing adverse influence on the antenna input of the television, video device, BS tuner, or CS tuner. Move this remote control farther away from the antenna input of the affected device.

Usable range

! Designed for use only within private homes

(signal transmission distance may be reduced

due to room design or conditions). In the following cases, this remote control cannot operate due to poor or erratic radio wave transmission. ! When signal transmission is blocked by a wall

or floor constructed of ferro-concrete or metal.

! Nearby large metal furniture objects. ! In large crowds of people, or near obstructive

buildings. ! Locations where another device using the

same 2.4 GHz frequency is being used, such

as a Bluetooth wireless technology device

or wireless LAN, or in the vicinity where the

magnetic field, static electricity, or radio wave

interference from another device may occur. ! When living in a housing complex (apartment,

condominium, etc.) where the next-door unit

has a microwave oven located near to this

remote control. Note that even a microwave

oven will not interfere with this remote control

when not in use. ! When using multiple Omni-Directional RF

Remote Control in the same location.

Signal reflection

! The signals reaching the remote control

include those transmitted in a straight line

from the main unit (direct waves), and those that are received after being bounced off of walls, furniture, and other buildings (reflected waves).

As a result, reflected waves can be generated

by obstacles and other reflective objects, causing variations in the signal quality. In such cases, try slightly changing the position of the remote control.

CAUTION

! With the exception of cases determined

by law to be the subject of legal liability, Pioneer refuses all responsibility for any harm resulting to the customer or other person as a result of the use of this remote control.

For safe use

! Do not use near electronic devices utilizing

high-precision or very delicate radio waves, since the other device may operate incorrectly,

resulting in malfunction. Examples of devices requiring particular caution: ! Hearing aids, pacemakers and other medical

or therapeutic electronic devices, fire/smoke

detectors, automatic door openers, other

automatic devices. ! Persons using pacemakers or other medical

or therapeutic electronic devices should

consult the manufacturer or dealer of their

device regarding the potential effects of radio

waves from this remote control. ! Do not use in aircraft, hospitals, or other

locations where the use of radio-wave-

generating devices is prohibited, since

adverse affects may be caused to flight

communications equipment or medical

devices. Follow all precautions and directives

given by medical institutions.

11 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX75)

Controlling the rest of your system

(In case of SC-LX75)

About the Remote Setup menu

Important

! This section includes explanations for the SC-

LX75’s remote control. For instructions for the SC-LX85’s remote control, see Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX85) on page

64.

The Remote Setup mode is set by pressing the number button while pressing RCU SETUP. The different items on the Remote Setup menu are described below. For their setting procedures, refer to the explanations for the respective items.

Setting What it does

Preset codes can be set for the various input functions. The remote control

Preset recall

Code learning

Multi operation

codes of a number of other devices (including products of other brands) are preset in the remote control to allow these devices to be operated. See Selecting preset codes directly on page 75.

Setting What it does

This is a function for automatically

System off

Direct function

Erase learning

Back light

Reset function

All reset

turning off the power of devices connected to the receiver. Multiple remote control codes can be set, as desired. See Multi Operation and System Off on page 76.

The backlight lighting pattern can be selected from among four modes, in consideration of convenience and battery service life. See Setting the backlight mode on page 76.

This is a function for resetting preset codes that have been set. Key resetting can be done for individual input functions. See Erasing all learnt set- tings that are in one input function on page 75.

This is a function for resetting all remote control unit settings you have made to the defaults set upon shipment from the factory. See Resetting the remote control settings on page 77.

Setting What it does

If you have multiple Pioneer receivers,

Change RC mode

amplifiers, etc., this setting can be used to prevent other units from operating simultaneously when the remote control unit is operated. See Operating multiple receivers on page 74.

Note

! You can cancel or exit any of the steps by

pressing RCU SETUP.

! After one minute of inactivity, the remote

automatically exits the operation.

Operating multiple receivers

Up to four receivers can be operated discretely

using this receiver’s remote control when using

multiple receivers, provided they are of the

same model as this receiver. The receiver to be

operated is switched by inputting the preset

code to set the remote control setting.

! Set the remote modes on the receivers before

using this function (see Remote Control Mode Setup on page 92).

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press

‘4’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once.

The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the number button for the

receiver (“Receiver 1” to “Receiver 4”) you

wish to operate.

For example, to operate “Receiver 2”, press ‘2’.

If the LED lights for one second and continues

to flash, the setting has been successfully

completed.

When the preset code is input, the LED flashes

three times to indicate that the setting has

failed.

Setting the remote to control other components

connected to the MONITOR OUT terminal to the TV CTRL button, and assign your satellite/ cable receiver or set-top box connected to the TV/SAT input terminal to the TV/SAT input button. If a single device is connected to both terminals, that device should be assigned to both the TV CTRL and TV/SAT input buttons.

! Devices may be assigned to the following

input function buttons.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DV DDVR HDMI

SAT

USB OPTION

iPod

TUNER

INPUT SELECT

ADPTHMG

CDTV

VIDEO

RECEIVER

TV CTRL

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX75)

Selecting preset codes directly

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘1’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL, press TV CTRL here. The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

3 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit preset code.

See Preset code list on page 116. If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. When the preset code is fully input, the LED flashes three times to indicate that the setting has failed. If this happens, enter the 4-digit preset code again.

4 Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the other components you want to control.

To try out the remote control, switch the component on or off (into standby) by pressing u SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there is one).

5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the preset setup mode.

Programming signals from other remote controls

If the preset code for your component is not available, or the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you can program signals from the remote control of another component. This

can also be used to program additional operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after assigning a preset code. The remote can store about 120 preset codes from other components (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only). Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls. The buttons available are shown below:

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVDDVR HDMI

SAT

CD HMGTV

USBOPTION

iPod

TUNER

VIDEO

RECEIVER

TV CTRL

SELECT

INPUT

MASTER VOLUME

INPUT

TV CONTROL

VOL

MUTE

ADPT

AUDIO

PARAMETER

LIST

TOP MENU BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

HOME MENU

iPod CTRL

AUTO / ALC /

STEREO

DIRECT

HDDDVD

DTV MPX PQLS

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC SLEEP

CH LEVELA.ATT DIMMER

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

VIDEO

PARAMETER

TOOLS

TUNE

T.EDIT

ENTER

PRESET

RETURN

TUNE

PGM

STANDARD

ADV SURR

PHASE

CTRL STATUSTHX

AUDIOHDMI OUT

INFO

DISP

546

8079

CLASS

ENTER

LIGHT

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘2’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

3 Point the two remote controls towards each other, then press the button that will be doing the learning on this receiver’s remote control.

The LED flashes once, then stops flashing, remaining lit.

! The remote controls should be 3 cm apart.

This receiver’s remote control

3 cm

Other remote control

4 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this receiver’s remote control.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed.

! If the LED flashes for five seconds, it means

the memory is full. See Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function on page 75 to erase a programmed button you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).

! Note that interference from TVs or other

devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.

! Some commands from other remote controls

cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.

5 To program additional signals for the current component repeat steps 3 and 4.

To program signals for another component, exit and repeat steps 2 through 4.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

Erasing one of the remote control button settings

This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘7’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased, then press ENTER.

The LED flashes once.

3 Press and hold the button to be erased for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

4 Repeat step 3 to erase other buttons.

5 Press RCU SETUP to exit the erasing mode.

Erasing all learnt settings that are in one input function

This operation erases all the operational settings of other devices that have been programmed in one input function, and restores the factory default. This function is handy for erasing all data programmed for devices no longer being used.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘9’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

11 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX75)

2 Press and hold the input function button corresponding to the command to be erased for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Direct function

! Default setting: On You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote control while at the same time, using your receiver to playback a different component. This could let you, for example, use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver, and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player. When direct function is on, any component you select (using the input function buttons) will be selected by both the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct function off, you can operate the remote control without affecting the receiver.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘5’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button for the component you want to control.

3 Press ‘1’ (On) or ‘0’ (Off) to switch the direct function mode.

If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. If the LED flashes three times, the setting has failed.

4 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.

Setting the backlight mode

! Default setting: 1 (normal mode) The backlight lighting pattern can be selected from among four modes, in consideration of convenience and battery service life.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘6’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the number button for the backlight mode you want to set.

! ‘1’ (normal mode) – The backlight is turned

on and off with the light button. After it lights, it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds.

! ‘2’ (frequent lighting mode) – The backlight

turns on when any button on the remote control is pressed. It is turned off with the light button. After it lights, it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 10 seconds.

! ‘3’ (eco mode) – The backlight is turned on

and off with the light button. After it lights, it turns off automatically if no operation is performed for 5 seconds.

! ‘4’ (off mode) – The backlight does not turn

on even when the light button is pressed. If the LED lights for one second and continues to flash, the setting has been successfully completed. If the LED flashes three times, the setting has failed.

3 Press RCU SETUP to exit the setup.

Multi Operation and System Off

The Multi operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system. ! Be sure to call up the preset codes of devices

or perform programming signals for other remote controls before multi operation

memory programming (page 75). The Multi operation feature makes it easy to perform the following operations by pressing just two buttons. Press MULTI OPERATION and then the DVD input function button to:

1. Switch this receiver on.

2. Switch this receiver’s input to DVD.

3. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands. Similar to Multi operations, System off allows you to use two buttons to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time. Only one System off operation sequence may be programmed. Press MULTI OPERATION and then u SOURCE to:

1. Transmit a sequence of up to five programmed commands.

2. Switch off all Pioneer devices including the receiver (except DVD recorders and VCRs). For greater convenience, program this receiver to perform power on/off and playback operations on non-Pioneer devices as well. (The signals for Pioneer devices described above are not contingent on programming for nonPioneer devices.) The buttons that can be programmed using Multi operation or System off are the same buttons as those that can be programmed for other remote controls (see Programming signals from other remote controls on page 75).

Note

! Before Multi operation and System off will

work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 74 for more on this).

! Some units may take some time to power up,

in which case multiple operations may not be possible.

! Power on and off commands only work with

components that have a standby mode.

! Some remote controllers for other

manufacturers’ devices use the same signals for switching the power on and off. In some cases, even if this receiver is programmed to perform these commands, power to the nonPioneer devices may not be switched on and off correctly. Program the receiver to perform these commands if the non-Pioneer device uses separate signals for power on/off.

Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown sequence

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘3’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button (or u SOURCE button).

For Multi operations, press the input function you wish to program (for example, if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player, press DVD).

! With Multi operation, the HDMI and TV CTRL

settings cannot be made. For other settable input functions, see Setting the remote to

control other components on page 74.

For System off, press the u SOURCE button.

The LED blinks twice and flashes continuously.

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX75)

3 If necessary, press the input function button for the component whose command you want to input.

This is only necessary if the command is for a new component (input function).

4 Select the button for the command you want to input.

The LED blinks once and flashes continuously.

! You don’t need to program the receiver to

switch on or off. This is done automatically. With Pioneer components, you don’t need to program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence (except DVD recorders).

5 Repeat steps 3 to 4 to program a sequence of up to five commands.

If you press RCU SETUP before programming is completed, commands programmed up to that point will be stored.

6 Press RCU SETUP to exit the programming mode.

Using multi operations

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Within five seconds, press an input function button that has been set up with a multi operation.

The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically.

Using System off

1 Press MULTI OPERATION.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Within five seconds, press u SOURCE.

The command sequence you programmed will run, then all Pioneer components will switch

off, followed by this receiver (switch of all the zones becomes off).

! In order to avoid accidently switching off a

DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.

Erasing the settings for the multi-operation

This erases all the settings programmed in the remote control for the multi-operation.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘8’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

! To cancel the preset setup mode press

RCU SETUP.

2 Press the input function button containing the program you want to cancel or the u SOURCE button for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Resetting the remote control settings

Use this procedure to reset all the remote control’s settings to the factory default. ! When preset codes are set, all the signals

learned in the input function buttons are cleared. This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input function buttons.

1 Press and hold RCU SETUP, then press ‘0’ for three seconds.

Release the button after the LED flashes once. The LED continues to flash.

2 Press and hold the ENTER button for three seconds.

If the LED lights for one second, the erasing has been successfully completed.

Default preset codes

Input function button Preset code

DVD

DVR/BDR

HDMI

TV/SAT

VIDEO

TV CTRL

2246

2248

2238

2247

0186

5066

1077

0186

11 Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX75)

Controlling components

This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes (see Setting the remote to control other components on page 74 for more on this). Use the input function buttons to select

the component.

! The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the

TV CTRL button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL button.

MULTI

SOURCERECEIVER

OPERATION

RCU SETUP

BDR

BD DVDDVR HDMI

SAT

USB OPTION

iPod

INPUT

TV CONTROL

AUDIO

PARAMETER

TOP MENU

BAND GUIDE

PRESET

PTY

iPod CTRL

AUTO / ALC /

DIRECT

HDDDVD

DTV MPX PQLS

SIGNAL SEL

CH LEVEL A.ATTDIMMER

D.ACCESS

/ CLR

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

CDTV

TUNER

VIDEO

TV CTRL

SELECT

INPUT

VOL

TOOLS

LIST

TUNE

ENTER

HOME

TUNE

PGM

STEREO

STANDARD

PHASE

CTRLTHX STATUS

222

MCACCSLEEP

546

8079

CLASS

ENTER

RECEIVER

ADPTHMG

RECEIVER

MASTER VOLUME

MUTE

VIDEO

PARAMETER

T.EDIT

RETURN

ADV SURR

AUDIOHDMI OUT

INFO

DISP

LIGHT

PRESET

TV and Audio/Video components

Button(s) TV TV (Monitor) BD/DVD

u SOURCE

POWER ON/ OFF

POWER ON/OFF

POWER ON/ OFF

HDD/ BDR/DVR

POWER ON/ OFF

VCR

POWER ON/ OFF

Number buttons numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics

!/CLR k (dot)

KURO LINK CLEAR + —

ENTER (CLASS) CH ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER

EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU — LIST

TOOLS/ GUIDE/EPG

USER MENU

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER — ENTER

HOME MENU

TOOLS <a>

HOME MENU

GUIDE — GUIDE

—

HOME MENU

—

RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN — RETURN

HDD (Red) Red Red — HDD — Red

DVD (Green) Green Green — DVD — Green

(Yellow)

(Blue)

AUDIO

DISP

Yellow Yellow — VCR — Yellow

Blue Blue MENU MENU — Blue

— —

— AUTO SETUP

— FREEZE

— —

TV/DTV AV SELECTION

— SCREEN SIZE

d d d d

e e e e

g g g g

m m m m

n n n n

o o

p p

—

AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO

DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY —

OUTPUT

CH +/–

CH +/– CH +/–

RESOLUTION +/–

CH +/– CH +/– CH +/–

<a>

a Controls for BD.

SAT/ CATV

POWER ON/ OFF

i/j/k/l

HOME MENU

DISPLAY/ INFO

Controlling the rest of your system (In case of SC-LX75)

Audio/Video components

Button(s) LD

u SOURCE

Number buttons numerics numerics numerics —

!/CLR

ENTER (CLASS) ENTER DISC/ENTER

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

d d d d d

e e e e e

g g g g g

m m m m m

n n n n n

o o o o o

p p p p p

AUDIO

DISP

a Controls for MD. b Controls for SACD.

POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF POWER ON/OFF

+10 >10/CLEAR

TOP MENU — —

—

ENTER — — —

—

RETURN — — —

AUDIO

DISPLAY/INFO

CD/CD-R/ SACD

LEGATO LINK

— —

SACD SETUP

PURE AUDIO

TIME

MD/DAT TAPE

CLEAR <a>

OPEN/CLOSE <a>

—

— —

CLEAR

ENTER

MSc

MSd

e/g/m/n

TV (Projector)

Button(s) TV (Projector)

u SOURCE

!/CLR

ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP

i/j/k/l i/j/k/l

ENTER

AUDIO

DISP

CH +/–

POWER ON

MOVIE

STANDARD

DYNAMIC

USER1

USER2

USER3

COLOR+

SHARP+

GAMMA

COLOR–

SHARP–

EXIT

INFO

ENTER

TEST

HIDE

HDMI1

HDMI2

COMP.

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

BRIGHT–

BRIGHT+

POWER OFF

ASPECT

CONTRAST+/–

12 The Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC menu

About remote control operation

Important

! The procedure for setting the receiver

button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu

The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in Pioneer’s laboratories with the aim of making it possible for home users to perform adjustments of the same level as in a studio easily and with high precision. The acoustic characteristics of the listening environment are measured and the frequency response is calibrated accordingly to allow high precision, automatic analysis and optimal calibration of the sound field to bring it closer to a studio environment than ever before. Furthermore, while it was previously difficult to eliminate standing waves, this receiver is equipped with a standing wave control function using a unique process to perform acoustic analysis and reduce their influence. This section describes how to calibrate the sound field automatically and fine-adjust the sound field data manually.

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the

Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the Home Menu, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 for a quick and effective

automatic surround setup.

! Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC

(Expert) on page 80 for a more detailed

MCACC setup.

In addition, the Full Band Phase Control

function calibrates the frequency-phase characteristics of the connected speakers.

! Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker

settings and customizes the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 82).

! Demo – No settings are saved and no errors

occur. When the speakers are connected to this receiver, the test tone is output repeatedly. Press RETURN to cancel the test tone.

Automatic MCACC (Expert)

If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, you can customize your setup options below. You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC presets, which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).

Important

! Make sure the microphone/speakers are not

moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.

! The screen saver will automatically appear

after five minutes of inactivity.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup

are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu, then press ENTER.

If the Advanced MCACC screen is not displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 80.

2 Select the parameters you want to set.

Use i/j to select the item, then use k/l to set.

! Auto MCACC – The default is ALL

(recommended), but you can limit the system calibration to only one setting (to save time) if you want. — When data measurement is taken (after

selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverb characteristics data (both beforeand after-calibration) that this receiver had been storing will be overwritten.

— When measurement is performed

with other than SYMMETRY (after selecting ALL or Keep SP System), the reverberation characteristics after calibration cannot be predicted, so the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”) cannot be displayed. If you will need to display the graph for the characteristics after calibration (“After”), take the measurement using the EQ Professional menu in the Manual MCACC setup (page 82).

— The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is

also taken when ALL or Keep SP System is selected. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 83 for more on this.

— Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ

Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 57.

! EQ Type (only available when

the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – This determines how

the frequency balance is adjusted. After a single calibration is performed, each of the following three correction curves can be stored separately in the MCACC memory. SYMMETRY implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel. FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels). If you selected ALL or Keep SP System as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the SYMMETRY, ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.

The Advanced MCACC menu

! THX Speaker (only available when the

Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES when using

THX speakers (all speakers other than the front speakers are set to SMALL). In other cases, leave at NO.

! STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available

when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to measurements at the listening position, you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several seating positions in your listening area. Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on-screen and note that the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position:

3rd reference point

2nd reference point

Main listening position

3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

AUTO SURR/ALC/

MCACC

SETUP MIC

iPod iPhone iPad

DIRECT CONTROL

STREAM DIRECT

5V 2.1 A

iPod iPhone iPad

USB

Microphone

Tripod

MULTI-ZONE

CONTROL ON/OFF

PHONES

If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your normal listening position. If you do not have a tripod, use some other object to install the microphone.

! It may not be possible to measure correctly

if the microphone is placed on a table, sofa, etc.

4 When you’re finished setting the options, select START then press ENTER.

5 Follow the instructions on-screen.

6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while it’s doing this.

! With error messages (such as Too much

ambient noise! or Check microphone.),

! Do not adjust the volume during the test

tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.

7 If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI screen.

The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the actual speakers you have. If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically. In this case, you don’t need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8.

! If you see an ERR message (or the speaker

! If the speaker is not pointed to the

microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected.

If Reverse Phase is displayed, the speaker’s

wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker connections. — If the connections were wrong, turn off

the power, disconnect the power cord, then reconnect properly. After this, perform the Auto MCACC procedure again.

— If the connections were right, select

GO NEXT and continue.

8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.

A progress report is displayed on-screen while the receiver outputs more test tones to determine the optimum receiver settings.

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.

! If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-Point

setup (in step 2), you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position.

9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is completed and the Advanced MCACC menu reappears automatically.

The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the Manual MCACC setup menu (starting below) or Manual SP Setup menu (starting on page

87).

! Depending on the characteristics of your

room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 87.

! The subwoofer distance setting may be

farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.

! If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results

are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment, we

recommend adjusting the settings manually. You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the

MCACC Data Check screen (see Checking MCACC Data on page 85).

Press RETURN after you have finished checking each screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back to the Home Menu. Be sure to disconnect the microphone from this receiver upon completion of the Auto MCACC Setup.

12 The Advanced MCACC menu

Manual MCACC setup

You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more familiar with the system. Before making these settings, you should have already completed Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers).

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Manual MCACC

setup are output at high volume.

Important

! Press the MCACC button while the pertinent

setup screens are displayed to select MCACC presets.

! For some of the settings below, you’ll have to

connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position. Press HOME MENU to display the Home Menu before you connect the microphone to this receiver.

! See Problems when using the Auto MCACC

Setup on page 35 for notes regarding high

background noise levels and other possible interference.

! If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and

turn up the volume to the middle position.

1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the Advanced MCACC menu.

See Making receiver settings from the Advanced MCACC menu on page 80 if you’re not already

at this screen.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to make these settings in order.

! Fine Channel Level – Make fine adjustments

to the overall balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel Level on page 82).

! Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay

settings for your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on page 82).

! Standing Wave – Control overly resonant

low frequencies in your listening room (see Standing Wave on page 83).

The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 83:

! EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency

balance of your speaker system while listening to test tones (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 83).

! EQ Professional – Calibrate your system

based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room’s reverb characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 83).

! Precision Distance (SC-LX85 only) – Fine-

adjusting the positions of the speakers (see Precision Distance on page 84).

Fine Channel Level

! Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels) You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. You can adjust the Channel Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 87.

1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference level.

2 Adjust the level of the left channel.

This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so that

you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels.

! After pressing ENTER, test tones will be

output.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/–12.0 dB) as necessary.

Use k/l to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds like both tones are the same volume, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

! For comparison purposes, the reference

speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,

simply use i/j to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Fine Speaker Distance

! Default setting: 3.00m (all speakers) For proper sound depth and separation with your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 cm increments. The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 87.

1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position.

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary.

Use k/l to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker. Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel. From the listening

position, face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span.

! If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting

the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.

! The subwoofer’s test tone differs in tone from

other channels. Adjust so that the sound of the subwoofer can be heard distinctly. Note that when adjusting the subwoofer, depending on the low frequency response of your speaker, it may be difficult to hear the change even when the setting is increased or decreased or when the position of the speaker is changed. Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).

When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up, press j to confirm and continue to the next channel.

! For comparison purposes, the reference

speaker will change depending on which speaker you select.

! If you want to go back and adjust a channel,

simply use i/j to select it.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

The Advanced MCACC menu

Standing Wave

! Default setting: ON/ATT 0.0dB (all filters) Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain conditions, sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area. This can have a negative effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room, it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During playback of a source, you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets. ! Standing Wave control filter settings cannot

be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.

! Filter Channel – Select the channel to which

you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all except center channel and subwoofer), Center or SW (subwoofer).

! TRIM (only available when the filter channel

above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to compensate for the difference in output post-filter).

! Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter

parameters where Freq represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust

! Default setting: ON/0.0dB (all channels/

bands) Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in Automatically conduct- ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 80, you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes.

1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your liking.

Use i/j to select the channel. Use k/l to select the frequency and i/j to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to the top of the screen and press k to return to Ch, then use i/j to select the channel.

! The OVER! indicator shows in the display

if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort. If this happens, bring the level down until OVER! disappears from the display.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

Note

! Changing the frequency curve of one channel

too drastically will affect the overall balance. If

the speaker balance seems uneven, you can

raise or lower channel levels using test tones

with the TRIM feature. Use k/l to select

TRIM, then use i/j to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. Performing the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional procedure is effective when the lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it sounds ‘boomy’) as shown at Type A below, or when different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics as shown at Type B.

! Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low

frequencies

Level

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Low frequencies

High frequencies

Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range

160

Time (in msec)

! Type B: Reverb characteristics for

different channels

Level

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro. calibration range

Front L

Front R

Conventional MCACC EQ calibration range

160

Time (in msec)

Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional

1 Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.

2 Select an option and press ENTER.

! Reverb Measurement – Use this to

measure the reverb characteristics before and after calibration.

! Reverb View – You can check the reverb

measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel. — If the Reverb View procedure is

performed after the Automatically

conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or

Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function.

! Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the

time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration, based on the reverb measurement of your listening area. Note that customizing system calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 80 and is not necessary if you’re satisfied with these settings.

12 The Advanced MCACC menu

3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ ON or EQ OFF, and then START.

The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View:

! EQ OFF – You will see the reverb

characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this receiver (before calibration).

! EQ ON – You will see the reverb

characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area. — The calibration corresponding to the

currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, press MCACC to select the MCACC memory you want to store.

— After auto calibration with EQ Type

: SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.

When the reverb measurement is finished, you can select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 98 for troubleshooting information.

4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.

The reverb characteristics are displayed when the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb Measurement measurements are conducted. Use k/l to select the channel, frequency and calibration setting you want to check. Use

i/j to go back and forth between the three.

The reverb characteristics graph before and

after EQ calibration can be displayed by select-

ing Calibration : Before / After. Note that the

markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in

2 dB steps.

5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected,

select the MCACC memory to be stored,

then enter the desired time setting for

calibration, and then select START.

! To specify the place where the MCACC

memory is to be stored, press MCACC to

select the MCACC memory you want to store. Based on the reverb measurement above, you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting. For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms setting. Use k/l to select the setting. Use i/j to switch between them. Select the setting from the following time periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,

20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and 60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all

channels during calibration. When you’re finished, select START. It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish. After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are given the option to check the settings on-screen.

Precision Distance

SC-LX85 only

Before using this function, perform the Full Auto MCACC Setup procedure (see page 34). Performing the Full Auto MCACC procedure corrects the distance to a precision of 1 cm, but the Precision Distance function lets you

adjust the distance to the speakers (their position) with a precision of under 1 cm. Here, rather than correct the numerical value of the distance, actually move the physical positions of the speakers to fine-adjust (the subwoofer cannot be adjusted). The input from the microphone is indicated on the screen. Fine-adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum. The detailed distance adjustments that were previously performed by skilled installers by ear can easily be performed watching the gauge on the monitor. Place the microphone in the same position as when the microphone was connected and the Full Auto MCACC operation was performed.

1 Select ‘Precision Distance’ from the Manual MCACC setup menu.

2 Fine-adjust the positions of the speakers in sequence, starting from the front right channel.

Test pulses are output from the speaker for the selected channel and from one other speaker. Move the position of the selected speaker 1 cm towards or away from the microphone. Watch the screen when doing so, and fine-adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum. Also, the channel serving as the standard differs according to the channel being adjusted. Do not move the speaker serving as the standard channel. The maximum gauge reading is 10.0. (If the reading stays under 10.0, adjust the speaker for the maximum value.)

! If the microphone is placed in a different

position from when the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC procedure was performed, it may not be possible to adjust properly. In this case, we recommend performing the procedure at Fine Speaker Distance on page 82 in the Manual MCACC measurements, then performing the adjustment described here without moving the microphone.

! The adjustment here is for adjusting for

an error of 1 cm or less (not adjustable with the Auto MCACC Setup). 0.0 may be displayed after distance correction with the Auto MCACC Setup, but even in this case this adjustment allows you to optimize the correction. Note that if the Auto MCACC Setup is performed after completing the fineadjustment here, the correction precision will drop to about 1 cm.

! Like with the Auto MCACC Setup, perform

this adjustment in as quiet an environment as possible. 0.0 will be displayed if abrupt noise is input during the adjustment.

! The distance for all the channels can only

be made uniform even if the R (front right) channel is adjusted in the proper order.

! Be very careful not to tip the speakers over

when moving them.

! The result of the adjustment performed

here can be checked by listening to the test pulses output at the Precision Distance (the test pulses will be more centrally positioned between the speakers than before the adjustment was performed). Be careful not to change the distance values at this time.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.

The Advanced MCACC menu

Checking MCACC Data

At the procedure of Automatically conducting optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, the procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 80 or after fine-adjusting at Manual MCACC setup on page 82, you can

check your calibrated settings using the GUI screen.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the setting you want to check.

! Speaker Setting – Used to check the

settings of the speaker systems. See Speaker Setting on page 85 for more on this.

! Channel Level – Used to check the output

level of the different speakers. See Channel Level on page 85 for more on this.

! Speaker Distance – Used to check the

distance to the different speakers. See Speaker Distance on page 85 for more on this.

! Standing Wave – Used to check the

standing wave control filter settings. See Standing Wave on page 85 for more on this.

! Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check

the calibration values of the listening environment’s frequency response. See Acoustic Cal EQ on page 85 for more on this.

! Group Delay – Used to check the speakers’

group delay (both before and after calibration). See Group Delay on page 85 for more on this.

4 Press RETURN to go back to the MCACC Data Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Home Menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this to display the speaker size and number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on page 88 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 Select the channel you want to check.

Use i/j to select the channel. The corresponding channel on the layout diagram is highlighted.

Channel Level

Use this to display the level of the various channels. See Channel Level on page 89 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The level of the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Speaker Distance

Use this to display the distance from the different channels to the listening position. See Speaker Distance on page 89 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

The distance from the various channels set at the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is displayed for channels that are not connected.

Standing Wave

Use this to display the standing wave related adjustment values for the various MCACC memories. See Standing Wave on page 83 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel for which you want to check standing wave control.

The standing wave related calibration value for the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Acoustic Cal EQ

Use this to display the calibration values for the frequency response of the various channels set in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 83 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use i/j to select the channel.

The calibration value for the frequency response of the selected channel stored at the selected MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

3 Press k to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use i/j to select the MCACC preset you want to check.

Group Delay

Use this to display the calibrated speaker group delay results. See Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control on page 48 for more on this.

1 Select ‘Group Delay’ from the MCACC Data Check menu.

2 When ‘Channel’ is highlighted, use k/l to select the channel you want to check.

The result of group delay calibration for the selected channel is displayed. When measurements have been performed with Full Auto MCACC selected at Advanced MCACC or with ALL or

Full Band Phase Ctrl selected when Auto MCACC is selected, the graph before

group delay calibration is also displayed. When After is selected at Calibration, the group delay after calibration is displayed. Compared to when Before is selected, with After there is less difference in the delay between frequency bands and the group delay between the different channels is uniform, allowing you to check the full band phase control effect. No Data is displayed if the selected group delay has not been measured.

12 The Advanced MCACC menu

Data Management

This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the same listening position). This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV). From this menu you can copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don’t need.

! This can be done in Automatically conducting

optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on

page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 80, either of which you should have already completed.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Memory Rename – Name your MCACC

presets for easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets on page 86).

! MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings from

one MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC preset data on page 86).

! MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC

presets that you don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets on page 86).

Renaming MCACC presets

If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re using, you may want to rename them for easier identification.

1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then select an appropriate preset name.

Use i/j to select the preset, then k/l to select a preset name.

3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary, then press RETURN when you’re finished.

You will return to the Data Management setup menu.

Copying MCACC preset data

If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on page 82), we recommend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a reference point from which to start.

! The settings made in Automatically conducting

optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on

page 34 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page

80.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the setting you want to copy.

! All Data – Copies all the settings of the

selected MCACC preset memory.

! Level & Distance – Copies only the channel

level and speaker distance settings of the

selected MCACC preset memory.

3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the settings ‘From’, then specify where you want to copy them (‘To’).

Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the settings.

When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not copied. Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

Clearing MCACC presets

If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the Data Management setup menu.

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.

Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).

3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the preset.

When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed, select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not cleared. Completed! shows in the GUI screen to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu.

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

About remote control operation

Important

! The procedure for setting the receiver

button. When “set the remote control to the receiver operation mode” is indicated in these instructions, use the respective procedure described above.

Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu

The following section describes how to change the speaker-related settings manually and make various other settings (input selection, OSD language selection, etc.).

1 Press u RECEIVER to switch on the receiver and your TV.

Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver.

2 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

! Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the

Home Menu.

3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

! Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of

connection used for surround back terminals and the size, number distance and overall balance of the connected speakers (see Manual speaker setup on page 87).

! Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve

connected to the digital, HDMI and component video inputs (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

! OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display

language can be changed (see Changing the OSD display language (OSD Language) on page 34).

! Network Setup – Conducts the setup

necessary to connect this unit to the network (see Network Setup menu on page 89).

! HDMI Setup – Synchronizes this receiver

with your Pioneer component supporting Control with HDMI (page 54).

! Other Setup – Makes customized settings

to reflect how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup menu on page 91).

Manual speaker setup

This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance. You only need to make these settings once (unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers). These settings are designed to customize your system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically conducting optimum

sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34, it isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.

CAUTION

! The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup

are output at high volume.

1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press ENTER.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 87 if you’re not already at

this screen.

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! Speaker System – Specifies how you are

using your surround back speaker terminals and B speaker terminals (page 87).

! Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and

number of speakers you’ve connected (page

88).

! Channel Level – Adjusts the overall balance

of your speaker system (page 89).

! Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance

of your speakers from the listening position (page 89).

! X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of your

speaker system for movie soundtracks (page

89).

! THX Audio Setting – Specifies whether you

are using a THX speaker setup (page 89).

3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Speaker system setting

! Default setting: 9.1ch FH/FW There are several ways you can use the speaker terminals with this receiver. In addition to a normal home theater setup where they are used for the front height speakers or front wide speakers, they can be used for bi-amping the

speakers or as an independent speaker system in another room.

1 Select ‘Speaker System’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu on page 87 if you’re not already at

this screen.

2 Select the speaker system setting.

! 9.1ch FH/FW – Select for normal home

theater use with front height and front wide speakers in your main (speaker system A) setup.

! 7.1ch + Speaker B – Select to use the B

speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in another room (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61).

! 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if

you’re bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 18).

! 7.1ch + ZONE 2 – Select to use the front wide

speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 61).

! 7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2 – Select to use the

surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 61).

! 5.1ch Bi-Amp + ZONE 2 – Select this to use

the surround back speaker terminals for an independent system in another zone with the front speakers bi-amped (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 18).

! 5.1ch + ZONE 2+3 – Select to use the

surround back (ZONE 2) and front wide (ZONE 3) speaker terminals for an independent systems in another zone (see

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 61).

SC-LX85 only:

! 5.1ch + SP-B Bi-Amp – Select this setting

if you’re bi-amping your B speakers (see Bi- amping your speakers on page 18).

! 5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp – Select this setting

if you’re bi-amping your front and surround

13 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 18).

! 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp – Select this setting

if you’re bi-amping your front and center speakers (see Bi-amping your speakers on page 18).

3 If you selected 9.1ch FH/FW,

7.1ch + Speaker B, 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp or 7.1ch + ZONE 2 in Step 2, select the placement of the surround speakers.

In a 7.1-channel surround system with surround speakers placed directly at the sides of the listening position, the surround sound of

5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. This function mixes the sound of the surround speakers with the surround back speakers so that the surround sound is heard from diagonally to the rear as it should be. Depending on the positions of the speakers and the sound source, in some cases it may not be possible to achieve good results. In this case, set the setting to ON SIDE or IN REAR.

! ON SIDE – Select when the surround

speakers is positioned right beside you.

! IN REAR – Select when the surround speaker

is positioned obliquely behind you.

4 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed, select Yes.

If No is selected, the setting is not changed. You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Speaker Setting

Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration (size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically conduct- ing optimum sound tuning (Full Auto MCACC) on page 34 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently. ! If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all

speakers to SMALL.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set, then select a speaker size.

Use k/l to select the size (and number) of each of the following speakers:

! Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers

reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.

! Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker

reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to the front speakers).

! FH – Select LARGE if your front height

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front height speakers, choose NO (the front height channel is sent to the front speakers). — You can adjust this setting only

when Speaker System setting is

9.1ch FH/FW, 7.1ch + Speaker B or

7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2.

— If the surround speakers are set to NO,

this setting will automatically be set to NO.

! FW – Select LARGE if your front wide

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect front wide speakers, choose NO (the front wide channel is sent to the front speakers). — You can adjust this setting only when

Speaker System setting is 9.1ch FH/FW or 7.1ch FH/FW + ZONE 2.

— If the surround speakers are set to NO,

this setting will automatically be set to NO.

! Surr – Select LARGE if your surround

speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a subwoofer).

! SB – Select the number of surround back

speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose NO. — You can adjust this setting only when

Speaker System setting is 9.1ch FH/FW,

7.1ch + Speaker B, 7.1ch Front Bi-Amp or 7.1ch + ZONE 2.

— If the surround speakers are set to

NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.

! SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of

channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from other speakers). — If you have a subwoofer and like lots of

bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you

may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by

selecting SMALL for the front speakers. If you select NO for the subwoofer the front speakers will automatically be fixed to LARGE. Also, the center, surround, surround back, front height and front wide speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.

3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.

Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).

! This setting decides the cutoff between bass

sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.

! With Full Auto MCACC setup

or Auto MCACC setup (ALL or Speaker Setting), the setting here will not apply and the crossover frequency will be automatically set. Crossover frequency is a frequency aimed at achieving the optimal sound field taking into account the bass capacity of all connected speakers and human aural characteristics.

! If you’re using THX speakers, confirm that

the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

Channel Level

Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system, an important factor when setting up a home theater system.

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

The test tones will start.

2 Adjust the level of each channel using k/l.

Use i/j to switch speakers. Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted.

! If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL)

meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Note

! You can change the channel levels by set the

remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press CH LEVEL, and then using k/l on the remote control.

Speaker Distance

For good sound depth and separation from your system, you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position. The receiver can then add the proper delay needed for effective surround sound.

1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using k/l.

You can adjust the distance of each speaker in

0.01 m Increments.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Note

! For best surround sound, make sure the

surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position.

X-Curve

Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks. Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX, Pure direct or Optimum surround modes.

1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.

Use k/l to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope increases (to a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your room size:

Room size (

X-Curve (dB/oct)

! If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be

flat and the X-Curve has no effect.

≤36 ≤48 ≤60 ≤72 ≤300 ≤1000

)

–0.5 –1.0 –1.5 –2.0 –2.5 –3.0

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

THX Audio Setting

This menu allows the user to adjust various THX features including Loudness Plus, SBch processing, THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer (on/off), and Boundary Gain Control. Please see page 108 for details regarding these THX features.

! ULTRA2 for the SC-LX85, SELECT2 for the

SC-LX75.

1 Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.

2 Select either ON or OFF for the THX Loudness Plus setting.

3 Specify whether the SBch Processing is AUTO or MANUAL.

! AUTO – When surround back speakers are

connected, Dolby Digital EX signal is present in the audio signals being input is detected and the appropriate THX surround mode is set.

! MANUAL – The desired THX surround mode

can be selected regardless of whether or not surround back channel signals are present in the audio signals being input.

4 Specify whether your subwoofer is Ultra2/Select2 certified or not.

If your subwoofer isn’t THX Ultra2/Select2 certified, but you still want to switch boundary gain compensation on, select YES here, but the effect might not work properly.

5 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain Compensation setting.

6 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Network Setup menu

Make the settings for connecting the receiver to the Internet and using the network functions.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Network Setup’ from the System Setup menu.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! IP Address, Proxy – Sets up the IP address/

Proxy of this receiver (page 89).

! Network Standby – Allows the AVNavigator

or iControlAV2 function to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode (page 90).

! Friendly Name – The name of the receiver

displayed on a computer or other device connected to the network can be changed (page 90).

! Parental Lock – Restricts usage of network

functions (page 90).

! Port Number Setting – Sets the numbers of

the ports where signals from IP Control are received (page 90).

! Wireless LAN Converter – Used to make the

wireless LAN converter’s access point and IP address settings (page 91).

IP address/Proxy setting

In case the router connected to the LAN terminal on this receiver is a broadband router (with a built-in DHCP server function), simply turn on the DHCP server function, and you will not need

13 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

to set up the network manually. You must set up the network as described below only when you have connected this receiver to a broadband router without a DHCP server function. Before you set up the network, consult with your ISP or the network manager for the required settings. It is advised that you also refer to the operation manual supplied with your network component. ! In case you make changes to the network

configuration without the DHCP server function, make the corresponding changes to the network settings of this receiver.

IP Address

The IP address to be entered must be defined within the following ranges. If the IP address defined is beyond the following ranges, you cannot play back audio files stored on components on the network or listen to Internet radio stations. Class A: 10.0.0.1 to 10.255.255.254 Class B: 172.16.0.1 to 172.31.255.254 Class C: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.255.254

Subnet Mask

In case an xDSL modem or a terminal adapter is directly connected to this receiver, enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP on paper. In most cases, enter 255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway

In case a gateway (router) is connected to this receiver, enter the corresponding IP address.

Primary DNS Server/ Secondary DNS Server

In case there is only one DNS server address provided by your ISP on paper, enter it in the ‘Primary DNS Server’ field. In case there are more than two DNS server addresses, enter ‘Secondary DNS Server’ in the other DNS server address field.

Proxy Hostname/Proxy Port

This setting is required when you connect this receiver to the Internet via a proxy server. Enter the IP address of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Hostname’ field. Also, enter the port number of your proxy server in the ‘Proxy Port’ field.

1 Select ‘IP Address, Proxy’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select the DHCP setting you want.

When you select ON, the network is automatically set up, and you do not need to follow Steps

3. Proceed with Step 4. If there is no DHCP server on the network and you select ON, this receiver will use its own Auto IP function to determine the IP address.

! The IP address determined by the Auto IP

function is 169.254.X.X. You cannot listen to an Internet radio station if the IP address is set for the Auto IP function.

3 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server.

Press i/j to select a number and k/l to move the cursor.

4 Select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’ for the Enable Proxy Server setting to deactivate or activate the proxy server.

In case you select ‘OFF’, proceed with Step 7. In case you select ‘ON’, on the other hand, proceed with Step 5.

5 Enter the address of your proxy server or the domain name.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

6 Enter the port number of your proxy server.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

7 Select ‘OK’ to confirm the IP Address/ Proxy setup.

Network Standby

This setting allows the AVNavigator or iControlAV2 function for operating the receiver from a computer connected on the same LAN as the receiver to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

1 Select ‘Network Standby’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Specify whether the Network Standby is ON or OFF.

! ON – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2

function can be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

! OFF – The AVNavigator or iControlAV2

function cannot be used when the receiver is in the standby mode (This lets you reduce power consumption in the standby mode).

Friendly Name

1 Select ‘Friendly Name’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select ‘Edit Name’ then select ‘Rename’.

If after changing the name you want to restore the name to the default, select Default.

3 Input the name you want.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

Parental Lock

Set restrictions for using Internet services. Also set the password accompanying the usage restrictions. ! Upon shipment from the factory, the password

is set to “0000”.

Important

When the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input is selected, the setting made here cannot be

reflected. Set the input to something other than HOME MEDIA GALLERY before making this setting.

1 Select ‘Parental Lock’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Input the password.

Use i/j to select a character, k/l to set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

3 Specify whether to turn Parental Lock on or off.

! OFF – Internet services are not restricted. ! ON – Internet services are restricted.

4 If you want to change the password, select Change Password.

In this case, the procedure returns to step 2.

Port Number Setting

On this receiver, there can be up to 5 numbers of ports where signals are received. One of these, port 8102 which used for communicating with iControlAV2, cannot be changed, but the desired number can be set for the 4 other ports.

1 Select ‘Port Number Setting’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Select the port number you want to change.

3 Input the port number.

! Use i/j to select a character, k/l to

set the position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.

! It is not possible to set the same port number

more than once.

4 If there are other port numbers you want to change, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Note

! When the wireless LAN converter (AS-WL300)

is connected, the port number cannot be set to port 3.

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

! We recommend setting the port number to 23

or within the range of 49152 to 65535.

! When the port number is changed, network

communications between the receiver and AVNavigator are no longer possible. In this case, click Settings on the AVNavigator’s function menu, select the IP Address tab and input one of the port numbers set on the receiver side to enable communications with AVNavigator.

Wireless LAN Converter

This setting is required for connecting a wireless LAN converter to the receiver and using wireless network functions. For the wireless LAN converter, use the AS-WL300.

Access Point Setting

Make the connection settings for the wireless LAN converter connected to the receiver and the access point. Connect the wireless LAN converter to the receiver and set DHCP on the “IP Address, Proxy” settings menu beforehand (page 89). There are four way to make the settings for connecting to the access point, as shown below. ! WPS (PBC) – Connection settings are made

automatically simply by pressing the WPS buttons on the access point and wireless LAN converter, following the instructions displayed on the receiver’s screen. This is the simplest way of making the settings, and is possible when the access point and wireless LAN converter are equipped with WPS buttons.

Network connection settings require

approximately 2 minutes from the time the WPS buttons are pressed. Wait until the settings are completed.

! WPS (PIN) – Display a list of the SSIDs of

connectable access points and select the access point to which you want to connect from this list. Connection settings are made by

inputting the 8-digit PIN code displayed on the receiver’s screen to the access point to which you want to connect.

! Search for Access Point – Display a list of

the SSIDs of connectable access points and select the access point to which you want to connect from this list. Connection settings with the access point are made by setting the access point’s security protocol, security key and WEP default key (only when the access point’s security protocol is WEP).

! Manual Setting – Connection settings are

made by manually inputting the SSID, security protocol, security key and WEP default key of the access point to which you want to connect.

Note

! When setting the wireless LAN converter, set

Network Standby to OFF, turn the receiver’s power off, then turn the power back on and set the wireless LAN converter. Check the network connections on the wireless LAN converter, then set Network Standby to ON as necessary.

! If there is a “; ” (semicolon) in the access

point’s SSID or security key, wireless LAN connection will not be possible even after the wireless LAN converter settings are completed. Change the setting of the access point’s SSID or security key to a character string that does not include a “; ” (semicolon).

! If it is not possible to connect to the access

point with the WPS (PBC) or WPS (PIN) connection settings, we recommend making the connection settings at Search for Access Point or Manual Setting.

WLAN IP Address

If the IP address of a device connected in the LAN other than the wireless LAN converter is set to “192.168.XXX.249”, the IP address of the wireless LAN converter will be redundant,

making connection to the access point impossible. In this case, use this setting to set an IP address specific to the wireless LAN converter.

1 Select ‘Wireless LAN Converter’ from the Network Setup menu.

2 Make the wireless LAN converter settings as necessary.

When making the connection settings of the wireless LAN converter and access point, select “Access Point Setting” and make the connection settings for the wireless LAN converter and access point following the instructions on the screen. If you want to set the wireless LAN converter’s IP address, select “WLAN IP Address” and input the IP address.

Checking the Network Information

The setting status of the following networkrelated items can be checked. ! IP Address – Check the IP address of this

receiver.

! MAC Address – Check the MAC address of

this receiver.

! Friendly Name – Friendly Name on page 90. ! SSID – Check the SSID of the access point

connected with the wireless LAN converter (only when a wireless LAN converter is connected).

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘Network Information’ from the Home Menu.

Display the setting status of the network-related items.

The Other Setup menu

The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the receiver.

1 Set the remote control to the receiver operation mode, then press HOME MENU.

A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears on your TV. Use i/j/k/l and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the current menu.

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the Home Menu.

3 Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.

If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to adjust these settings in order:

! Auto Power Down – Sets the power to turn

off automatically when the receiver is not being used.

! Volume Setup – Sets up the volume-related

operations of this receiver (page 92).

! Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this

receiver’s remote control mode (page 92).

! Flicker Reduction Setup – Adjusts the way

the GUI screen looks (page 92).

! Software Update – Use to update the

receiver’s software and check the version.

! SC-LX85 only: RF Remote Setup – Allows the CU-RF100

to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode (page 92).

! SC-LX75 only: EXTENSION Setup – Allows the CU-RF100

to be used even when the receiver is in the standby mode (page 92).

! SC-LX85 only: Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional

settings for a multi-channel input (page 92).

13 The System Setup and Other Setup menus

! Pairing Bluetooth Setup – Use to pair a

Bluetooth ADAPTER and Bluetooth wireless technology device (page 43).

5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.

Auto Power Down

The power can be set to turn off automatically if no operation has been performed for a specific amount of time with no audio or video signals being input to the receiver. When using ZONE 2 or ZONE 3, the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 power can also be set to turn off, but for ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 the power turns off automatically after the amount of time set here even if signals are being input or operations have been performed. Different times can be set for the main zone, ZONE 2 and ZONE 3.

1 Select ‘Auto Power Down’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the zone you want to set and set the time after which the power turns off.

! MAIN – The time can be selected from

among “15 min”, “30 min”, “60 min” and “OFF”. The power turns off after there has been no signal and no operation for the selected time.

! ZONE 2 – The time can be selected from

among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, “6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power turns off after the selected time.

! ZONE 3 – The time can be selected from

among “30 min”, “1 hour”, “3 hours”, “6 hours”, “9 hours” and “OFF”. The power turns off after the selected time.

Note

! Depending on the connected devices, the

Auto Power Down function may not work properly due to excessive noise or other reasons.

Volume Setup

You can set the maximum volume of this receiver or specify what the volume level will be when the power is turned on.

1 Select ‘Volume Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Power ON Level setting you want.

The volume can be set so that it is always set to the same level when the receiver’s power is turned on.

! LAST (default) – When the power is turned

on, the volume is set to the same level as when the power was last turned off.

! “---” – When the power is turned on, the

volume is set to minimum level.

! –80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to

be set when the power is turned on, in steps

of 0.5 dB. It is not possible to set a volume level greater than the value specified at Volume Limit setup (see below).

3 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.

Use this function to limit the maximum volume. The volume cannot be increased above the level set here, even by operating MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the front panel).

! OFF (default) – The maximum volume is not

limited.

! –20.0dB/–10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum

volume is limited to the value set here.

4 Select the Mute Level setting you want.

This sets how much the volume is to be turned down when MUTE is pressed.

! FULL (default) – No sound. ! –40.0dB/–20.0dB – The volume will be

turned down to the level specified here.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Remote Control Mode Setup

! Default setting: 1 This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to prevent erroneous operation when multiple units of the receiver are being used.

1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting you want.

3 Select ‘OK’ to change the remote control mode.

4 Follow the instructions on the screen to change the remote control’s setting.

See Operating multiple receivers on page 74.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Flicker Reduction Setup

! Default setting: OFF The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased. If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try changing this setting. Note that the resolution in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it has no influence on the video output.

1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you want.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

RF Remote Setup

SC-LX85 only

! Default setting: OFF The CU-RF100 can be used to operate the receiver by RF communications. To do so, set the RF Remote setting to ON. When ON is set here, the receiver can be operated even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

1 Select ‘RF Remote Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the RF Remote setting you want.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

EXTENSION Setup

SC-LX75 only

! Default setting: OFF A separately sold the CU-RF100 can be used to operate the receiver by RF communications. To do so, set the EXTENSION setting to ON. When ON is set here, the receiver can be operated even when the receiver is in the standby mode.

1 Select ‘EXTENSION Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the EXTENSION setting you want.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Multi Channel Input Setup

SC-LX85 only

You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi-channel input. Also, when the multichannel input is selected as an input function, you can display the video images of other input functions. In the Multi Channel Input Setup, you can assign a video input to the multi-channel input.

1 Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you want.

! 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the

level originally recorded on the source.

! +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at

the level increased by 10 dB.

The System Setup and Other Setup menus

3 Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.

When the multi-channel input is selected as an input function, you can display the video images of other input functions. The video input can be selected from the following: DVD,

TV/SAT, DVR/BDR, VIDEO, OFF.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.

You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Software Update

Use this procedure to update the receiver’s software and check the version. There are two ways to update: via the Internet and via a USB memory device. Updating via the Internet is performed by accessing the file server from the receiver and downloading the file. This procedure is only possible if the receiver is connected to the Internet. Updating via a USB memory device is performed by downloading the update file from a computer, reading this file onto a USB memory device then inserting this USB memory device into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel. With this procedure, the USB memory device containing the update file must first be inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel. ! If an update file is provided on the Pioneer

website, download it onto your computer. When downloading an update file from the Pioneer website onto your computer, the file will be in ZIP format. Unzip the ZIP file before saving it on the USB memory device. If there are any old downloaded files or downloaded files for other models on the USB memory device, delete them.

Important

! DO NOT unplug the power cord during

updating.

! When updating via the Internet, do not

disconnect the LAN cable. When updating via a USB memory device, do not disconnect the USB memory device.

1 Select ‘Software Update’ from the Other Setup menu.

2 Select the update procedure.

! Update via Internet – The receiver checks

whether updatable software is available via the Internet.

! Update via USB Memory – The receiver

checks whether the USB memory device inserted into the USB port on the receiver’s front panel contains updatable software.

“Accessing” is displayed and the update file

is checked. Wait a while.

3 Check on the screen whether or not an update file was found.

If “New version found.” is displayed, the update file has been found. The version number and updating time are displayed. If “This is the latest version. There is no need to update.” is displayed, no update file has been found.

4 To update, select OK.

The updating screen appears and updating is performed.

! The power turns off automatically once

updating is completed.

Software Update messages

Status messages

NO UPDATE FILE

FILE ERROR

UPDATE ERROR 1 to UPDATE ERROR 7

Update via USB

UE11

UE22

UE33

Descriptions

No update file was found on the USB memory device. Store the file in the USB memory device’s root directory.

Try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB device or storing the update file again. If the error still occurs, try using a different USB memory device.

Turn the receiver’s power off, then turn it back on and try updating the software again.

If this message flashes, updating has failed. Update via a USB memory device. Put the update file on a USB memory device and connect the device to the USB port. When the file is found, software updating starts automatically.

Updating has failed. Use the same procedure to update the software again.

14 Additional information

Additional information

Troubleshooting 1

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work. ! If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the

power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting below, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:

! Press u STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on. ! If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold u STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over 10

seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may be

cleared.)

Power

Symptom Remedy

The power does not turn on. Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.

Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.

SC-LX85 only: The power does not turn on.

Power cannot be turned off. (ZONE 2 ON or ZONE 3 ON is displayed.)

The receiver suddenly switches off or the iPod iPhone iPad indicator blinks.

When remote control operation is set to RF two-way communications, the receiver’s power cannot be turned on unless RF Remote Setup is set to ON (see RF Remote Setup on page 92).

When remote control operation is set to RF two-way communications, check whether the RF adapter is properly connected to the receiver.

SC-LX85 only:

Set the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3, then press u RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.

SC-LX75 only:

Press the remote control’s ZONE 2 or ZONE 3, then press u RECEIVER to switch the sub zone off.

Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.

The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Symptom Remedy

During loud playback the power suddenly switches off.

The unit does not respond when the buttons are pressed.

AMP ERR blinks in the display, then the power automatically switches off. The ADVANCED MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on.

AMP OVERHEAT blinks in the display and the FL OFF indicator flash and the power turns off.

The receiver suddenly power off or ADVANCED MCACC flashes.

FAN STOP is displayed, then iPod iPhone iPad indicator

blinks.

Display blinks 12V TRG ERR. An error has arisen in the 12 V trigger jacks. Reconnect accurately then turn

Turn down the volume.

Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 82.

Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front panel, press u STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use TUNE i/j to select D.SAFETY cOFFd, and then use PRESET k/l to select 1 or 2 (select D.SAFETY cOFFd to deactivate this feature). If the power switches off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some features may be unavailable.

Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.

Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.

The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on (see Installing the receiver on page 7).

Check whether the cables used to connect the speakers are short-circuited.

Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.

The temperature within the unit has exceeded the allowablevalue.

Lower the volume level.

The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

The built-in cooling fan is malfunctioning. Do not try switching the receiver on. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

the power back on.

Additional information

No sound

Symptom Remedy

No sound is output when an input function is selected. No sound is output from the front speakers.

No sound from the surround or center speakers.

No sound from surround back speakers.

No sound from front height or front wide speakers.

Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).

Make sure the correct input function is selected.

Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.

Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL).

Note that when Fixed PCM ON is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format (see Setting the Audio options on page 57).

Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 14).

Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 45).

Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Set- ting on page 88).

Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 89).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18). If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.

Check that the front height or front wide speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL, and the surround speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

The speaker terminal settings may be set so that no sound is output from the front height or front wide channel. Use the SPEAKERS button to select the proper setting (see Switching the speaker terminals on page 61).

Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

Symptom Remedy

No sound from subwoofer. Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume

No sound from one speaker. Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).

Sound is produced from analog components, but not from digital ones (DVD, LD, CD, etc.).

No sound is produced even if MULTI CH IN is selected.

No sound is output or a noise is output when Dolby Digital/ DTS software is played back.

No sound when using the Home Menu.

turned up.

If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.

Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or to a very quiet setting (see Setting the Audio options on page 57).

Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 89).

Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 88).

The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening modes, you may be able to create the missing channel (see Enjoying various types of playback using the listening modes on page 45).

Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 47).

Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 36).

Check the digital output settings on the source component.

If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

SC-LX85 only:

When 5.1ch F+Surr Bi-Amp or 5.1ch F+C Bi-Amp is selected in the Speaker System settings (when the center or surround speakers are bi-

amped), no sound is produced even when MULTI CH IN is selected.

Check that your BD or DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.

Check the digital output settings or the HDMI audio output settings of your BD or DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.

If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.

If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the Home Menu.

14 Additional information

Pioneer SC-LX75, SC-LX85 Operating Instruction

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual